User’s manual

iStudio
R5976569, current version
Title: iSTUDIO – user’s manual
ID-no.: R5976569
Revision: 09
Date: March-2007

main issue update

chapter 1
chapter 2
chapter 3
chapter 4
chapter 5 add.
chapter 6
chapter 7
chapter 8
chapter 9
chapter 10
chapter 11
chapter 12
chapter 13

new: The corresponding chapters are new or completely revised.

corr.: Passages of the corresponding chapter were corrected; see modification bars.
add.: Passages of the corresponding chapter were added; see modification bars.
This manual refers to following software releases:

iStudio R1.9.1
Hydra Open Protocol V1.0

Document history
Modifications, which result in a new version, are indicated by a vertical bar.

Windows and Windows NT are registered Trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

________________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 ii
Trademarks
Brand and product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks, registered trademarks or copyrights of
their respective holders. All brand and product names mentioned in this manual serve as comments or examples
and are not to be understood as advertising for the products or their manufacturers.

Copyright © 2007 by Barco

Die Weitergabe sowie die Vervielfältigung aller Unterlagen, die von uns überlassen werden, deren Verwertung
und Mitteilung ihres Inhaltes an Dritte ist nicht gestattet, soweit dies nicht ausdrücklich zugestanden ist.
Urheberrechte, insbesondere auch solche an Software, werden nur insoweit übertragen, als es für die Erreichung
des speziellen Vertragszwecks erforderlich ist. Zuwiderhandlungen können zu Schadensersatz verpflichten. Alle
Rechte aus der Erteilung eines Patents oder der Eintragung eines Gebrauchsmusters verbleiben bei uns.

Copyright © 2007 by Barco

All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced or translated. It shall not otherwise be
recorded, transmitted or stored in a retrieval system without the prior written consent of Barco.

Guarantee and compensation

Barco provides a guarantee relating to perfect manufacturing as part of the legally stipulated terms of guarantee.
On receipt, the purchaser must immediately inspect all delivered goods for damage incurred during transport, as
well as for material and manufacturing faults. Barco must be informed immediately in writing of any complaints.
The period of guarantee begins on the date of transfer of risks, in the case of special systems and software on
the date of commissioning, at the latest 30 days after the transfer of risks. In the event of justified notice of
complaint, Barco can repair the fault or provide a replacement at its own discretion within an appropriate period.
If this measure proves to be impossible or unsuccessful, the purchaser can demand a reduction in the purchase
price or cancellation of the contract (redhibition). All other claims, in particular those relating to compensation for
direct or indirect damage, and also damage attributed to the operation of software as well as to other services
provided by Barco, being a component of the system or independent services, will be deemed invalid provided
the damage is not proven to be attributed to the absence of properties guaranteed in writing or due to the intent
or gross negligence on the part of Barco.
If the purchaser or a third party carries out modifications or repairs on good delivered by Barco, or if the goods
are handled incorrectly, in particular if the systems are commissioned or operated incorrectly or if, after the
transfer of risks, the goods are subject to influences not agreed upon in the contract, all guarantee claims of the
purchaser will be rendered invalid. Not included in the guarantee coverage are system failures which are attrib-
uted to programs or special electronic circuitry provided by the purchaser, e. g. interfaces. Normal wear as well
as normal maintenance are not subject to the guarantee provided by Barco either.
The environmental conditions as well as the servicing and maintenance regulations specified in this manual must
be complied with by the customer.

_______________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 iii
Revision sheet

To:
• Barco Control Rooms GmbH
An der Rossweid 5, D-76229 Karlsruhe
Phone: +49-721-6201-0, Fax: +49-721-6201-298
E-mail: [email protected], Web: www.barcocontrolrooms.com

From:
Date:

Please correct the following points in this documentation (R5976569):

page wrong correct

_______________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 iv
Contents
1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 How this manual is organized .....................................................................................................................1-2

1.2 Styles and symbols.......................................................................................................................................1-3

1.3 Online manual ..............................................................................................................................................1-4

2 Summary ............................................................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1 Properties......................................................................................................................................................2-2

3 Getting started .................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Hardware devices.........................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.1 Hydra ....................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.2 Operator PC ..........................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.3 Network connection ............................................................................................................................3-2

3.2 Switching on and off ....................................................................................................................................3-3

3.2.1 Connecting from a user PC to the Hydra ............................................................................................3-3
3.2.2 Switching off ........................................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.3 Adjusting a Hydra to the LAN..............................................................................................................3-6

4 Basics................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Quick guide to iStudio ..................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 User interface.......................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Creating objects ...................................................................................................................................4-5
4.1.3 Defining the object properties ............................................................................................................4-6
4.1.4 Group functionality ..............................................................................................................................4-7
4.1.5 Grid .......................................................................................................................................................4-7
4.1.6 Displaying objects on the display area and projection module ........................................................4-7
4.1.7 Layouts .................................................................................................................................................4-8
4.1.8 Wall layouts .........................................................................................................................................4-8

4.2 Additional video related input.....................................................................................................................4-9

4.2.1 Closed caption......................................................................................................................................4-9
4.2.2 Teletext ................................................................................................................................................4-9
4.2.3 Vertical interval time code ..................................................................................................................4-9
4.2.4 WSS, VLI, AFD and ETSI.........................................................................................................................4-9
4.2.5 Tally ......................................................................................................................................................4-9
4.2.6 XDS .......................................................................................................................................................4-9
4.2.7 UMD......................................................................................................................................................4-9

4.3 System performance optimization ............................................................................................................4-10

4.3.1 Performance.......................................................................................................................................4-10
4.3.2 Japanese fonts ...................................................................................................................................4-10

5 Menu and toolbar ............................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Overview of shortcut keys and toolbar buttons..........................................................................................5-2

5.2 Wall ...............................................................................................................................................................5-5

________________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 v
 5.2.1 Wall Layout ..........................................................................................................................................5-5
5.2.2 Wall alarms area..................................................................................................................................5-7
5.2.3 Wall scenario........................................................................................................................................5-8
5.2.4 Wall script.............................................................................................................................................5-9
5.2.5 Wall Control........................................................................................................................................5-10
5.2.6 User settings ......................................................................................................................................5-11
5.2.7 Time setup .........................................................................................................................................5-13
5.2.8 Setup timings.....................................................................................................................................5-20
5.2.9 Setup hardware .................................................................................................................................5-21
5.2.10 Setup audio... ...................................................................................................................................5-22
5.2.11 Setup NGM-164… ............................................................................................................................5-23

5.3 Modules and sources..................................................................................................................................5-25

5.3.1 Updating work- and display area......................................................................................................5-26
5.3.2 Module control...................................................................................................................................5-27
5.3.3 Module status ....................................................................................................................................5-28
5.3.4 Setup module.....................................................................................................................................5-29
5.3.5 Setup encoders ..................................................................................................................................5-43
5.3.6 Setup streams ....................................................................................................................................5-48
5.3.7 Setup source ......................................................................................................................................5-49
5.3.8 Freeze, unfreeze source ....................................................................................................................5-58

5.4 Layout .........................................................................................................................................................5-59

5.4.1 Module layout....................................................................................................................................5-59
5.4.2 Setup layout.......................................................................................................................................5-60

5.5 Group (selection)........................................................................................................................................5-61

5.5.1 Enable group selection ......................................................................................................................5-61
5.5.2 Selecting objects................................................................................................................................5-62
5.5.3 Load, cut and paste object properties ..............................................................................................5-63
5.5.4 Stacking order of objects...................................................................................................................5-64
5.5.5 Hide/unhide objects..........................................................................................................................5-64
5.5.6 Freeze, unfreeze sources...................................................................................................................5-64
5.5.7 Align objects ......................................................................................................................................5-64

5.6 Object..........................................................................................................................................................5-66
5.6.1 Undo and redo ...................................................................................................................................5-67
5.6.2 New object and fill grid.....................................................................................................................5-67
5.6.3 Load, save or delete objects .............................................................................................................5-68
5.6.4 Edit object… .......................................................................................................................................5-69
5.6.5 Cut, copy, paste and paste new object properties...........................................................................5-86
5.6.6 Stacking order of an object ...............................................................................................................5-86
5.6.7 Hide/unhide object ...........................................................................................................................5-87
5.6.8 Object sizing.......................................................................................................................................5-87
5.6.9 Show viewer ......................................................................................................................................5-88

5.7 Grid..............................................................................................................................................................5-89
5.7.1 Fixed movement................................................................................................................................5-89
5.7.2 Lock objects........................................................................................................................................5-90
5.7.3 Transparent objects ...........................................................................................................................5-90
5.7.4 Maintain aspect ratio.........................................................................................................................5-91
5.7.5 Use vertical ........................................................................................................................................5-91
5.7.6 Aspect ratio ........................................................................................................................................5-92
5.7.7 Align grid............................................................................................................................................5-92

_______________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 vi
 5.7.8 Standard grid configurations.............................................................................................................5-92
5.7.9 Increasing and decreasing the grid ..................................................................................................5-93

5.8 Language ....................................................................................................................................................5-94

5.9 Release information ...................................................................................................................................5-94

6 Further GUI elements.......................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Administrator / user mode..........................................................................................................................6-2

6.2 Tree ...............................................................................................................................................................6-3

6.2.1 Modules................................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.2 Wall layouts .........................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.3 Layouts .................................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.4 Objects..................................................................................................................................................6-5
6.2.5 Sources .................................................................................................................................................6-5
6.2.6 Scripts ...................................................................................................................................................6-5

6.3 Statebar and messagebar ............................................................................................................................6-6

6.3.1 Statebar................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.2 Messagebar..........................................................................................................................................6-6

7 Error messages.................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 Source related errors....................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Audio errors .........................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.2 Synchronization errors.........................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.3 Video errors..........................................................................................................................................7-3

7.2 Device related errors....................................................................................................................................7-4

7.2.1 Hard- and software errors...................................................................................................................7-4

8 Advanced operation............................................................................................................................ 8-1

8.1 Data structure and data access....................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.1 Data access on Hydra ..........................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.2 Backup / restore procedures ..............................................................................................................8-3

8.2 Upgrading .....................................................................................................................................................8-4

8.3 Redundant operation ...................................................................................................................................8-7

8.4 Dual mode ....................................................................................................................................................8-8

8.5 Server port configuration ...........................................................................................................................8-10

9 Technical appendix ............................................................................................................................. 9-1

9.1 Order codes...................................................................................................................................................9-2

10 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 10-1

10.1 Hotline ......................................................................................................................................................10-2

11 Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol ................................................................................................ 11-1

11.1 Formatting ................................................................................................................................................11-2
11.1.1 XML...................................................................................................................................................11-2

______________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 vii
 11.1.2 Packets .............................................................................................................................................11-3
11.1.3 Error notification ..............................................................................................................................11-4

11.2 Connections ..............................................................................................................................................11-5

11.2.1 Transactions .....................................................................................................................................11-5
11.2.2 Events...............................................................................................................................................11-5
11.2.3 Closing a connection........................................................................................................................11-5

11.3 Transactions ..............................................................................................................................................11-6

11.3.1 Definition .........................................................................................................................................11-6
11.3.2 Commands – OverView ...................................................................................................................11-7
11.3.3 File related commands....................................................................................................................11-9
11.3.4 File content ....................................................................................................................................11-11
11.3.5 Wall related commands ................................................................................................................11-20
11.3.6 Module related commands ...........................................................................................................11-25
11.3.7 Source related commands.............................................................................................................11-30
11.3.8 Alarm related commands..............................................................................................................11-39
11.3.9 Object related commands .............................................................................................................11-40
11.3.10 Tally related commands..............................................................................................................11-42
11.3.11 Example .......................................................................................................................................11-43

11.4 Events .....................................................................................................................................................11-44

11.4.1 Definition .......................................................................................................................................11-44
11.4.2 Events – OverView .........................................................................................................................11-44
11.4.3 Available events ............................................................................................................................11-45

12 Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0................................................................ 12-1

12.1 How to use scripts without the user interface........................................................................................12-2
12.1.1 Java script code example ................................................................................................................12-3

12.2 Definition of script syntax ........................................................................................................................12-4

12.2.1 Examples of replacements..............................................................................................................12-5
12.2.2 Description of script commands......................................................................................................12-8
12.2.3 Description of source attributes (sources.cfg)..............................................................................12-13
12.2.4 Description of object attributes (Layouts) ....................................................................................12-14

12.3 Some example scripts............................................................................................................................12-17

12.3.1 Aspect script...................................................................................................................................12-17
12.3.2 Fullscreen script .............................................................................................................................12-18
12.3.3 List script ........................................................................................................................................12-18
12.3.4 Update script..................................................................................................................................12-19
12.3.5 Window script ................................................................................................................................12-19
12.3.6 UMD script......................................................................................................................................12-21
12.3.7 Tally script ......................................................................................................................................12-21
12.3.8 Source script...................................................................................................................................12-22
12.3.9 String script ....................................................................................................................................12-22

13 Index ............................................................................................................................................... 13-1

13.1 List of tables .............................................................................................................................................13-1

13.2 List of figures ............................................................................................................................................13-2

______________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 viii
 1. Introduction

1 Introduction
This chapter explains the structure of the manual itself and the used typographic styles and symbols.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 1-1
 1. Introduction

1.1 How this manual is organized

This manual describes the functionality of the iSTUDIO software that serves to operate HYDRA, HYDRA COMPACT and
HYDRA COMPACT TWIN controllers from Barco. (In the following only the term HYDRA will be used, which herewith
implies HYDRA, HYDRA COMPACT and HYDRA COMPACT TWIN, as the operation of iSTUDIO does not differ for these devices.
If a differentiation is necessary both devices will be mentioned explicitly. If there is a reference to the HYDRA
user’s manual please refer to the HYDRA, HYDRA COMPACT or HYDRA COMPACT TWIN user’s manual, depending on the
device you use.) The manual is divided into thirteen chapters:
• Introduction
explains the structure of the manual itself and the used typographic styles and symbols. Safety information is
provided concerning the operation of computer systems from Barco.
• Summary
gives an overview about the features the iSTUDIO software.
• Getting Started
describes the hardware necessary to use iSTUDIO and the way HYDRA is switched on.
• Basics
introduces the GUI of iSTUDIO and the way of using it and provides additional video related information.
• Menu and Toolbar
explains the whole functionality accessible via menu and toolbar
• Further GUI Elements
lists and explains the operational elements of iSTUDIO not explained in the section below.
• Error Messages
lists all potential error messages of iSTUDIO.
• Advanced Operation
explains data access, upgrading and special configurations.
• Technical Appendix
gives tabular overview about the order codes relying to iSTUDIO.
• Troubleshooting
gives advice, if iSTUDIO can not be properly operated.
• Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol
provides a reference to the open protocol
• Appendix B – Hydra Scripting Language Definition v1.0
contains the scripting language definition
• Index
gives an overview about the used tables and figures.
Chapters, pages, figures and tables are numbered separately. Chapters are indicated by »point syntax«, e. g.
4.2.3, pages by a »dash syntax«, e. g. 2-1, as figures and tables are, e. g. figure 5-4.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 1-2
 1. Introduction

1.2 Styles and symbols

The typographic styles and the symbols used in this document have the following meaning:

Bold Labels, menus and buttons are printed in Bold font.

Condensed Links to both other chapters of this manual and to sites in the Internet are printed
condensed. In the on-line version of this manual all hyperlinks appear teal.
Courier Names of files and parts from programs are printed in the Courier font.
Courier bold Inputs you are supposed to do from the keyboard are printed in Courier bold font.

Within a piece of programming code this arrow marks a line, that must be made up in two
ª
lines, though meant to be one line.

If you do not heed instructions indicated by this symbol there is a risk of damage to the
equipment!

If you do not heed instructions indicated by this symbol there is a risk of electrical shock and
danger to personal health!

If you do not heed instructions indicated by this symbol there is a risk of damage to parts,
which are sensitive towards electrostatic charge!

If you do not heed instructions indicated by this symbol there is a risk to get harmed by sharp
objects!

If you do not heed instructions indicated by this symbol there is a risk that parts may
explode!

If you do not heed instructions indicated by this symbol there is a risk that hot parts impact
persons or objects!

The sheet icon indicates additional notes.

Next to this icon you find further information.

This arrow marks tips.

Next to this icon you find important notes.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 1-3
 1. Introduction

1.3 Online manual

On the iSTUDIO documentation CD R5976593 this manual R5976569 as well as the HYDRA user’s manuals can be
found in electronically form. Insert the CD in the CD ROM drive to view the manual. If autorun is enabled on the
computer the start page of the CD comes up automatically. Else open the start page index.html of the CD manu-
ally.
On this start page you will find a link to the user’s manual of iStudio.
Acrobat Reader can be used to view the file. Adobe® Acrobat® Reader is free and freely distributable software
that lets you view and print Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) files.
If Acrobat Reader is already installed, the manual can be viewed just by a click on the respective link. Else the
Acrobat Reader must be installed first. The required installation files can also be found on the CD.
This CD contains also the current iSTUDIO readme file.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 1-4
 2. Summary

2 Summary
This chapter gives an overview about the features of iSTUDIO.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 2-1
 2. Summary

2.1 Properties
iSTUDIO is a complete video, audio and data monitoring system. It typically consists of one or more HYDRA control-
lers, a visualization system (usually a rear projection Display Wall) and the iSTUDIO software. The HYDRA is con-
trolled via a PC with a standard up to date web browser. The PC is connected to the HYDRA via the LAN. If more
sources shall be monitored or if the sources shall be displayed on a bigger display area, multiple HYDRAS may be
connected to multiple projection modules of a Display Wall.

iStudio software
The iSTUDIO software enables the operation and control of one or multiple HYDRAS. Multiple video, RGB and audio
sources can be monitored on one or multiple projection modules, depending on the number of HYDRAS.
The graphical user interface (GUI) of iSTUDIO has a work area, where video sources, RGB sources, audio sources
and other types of information can be arranged. The central concept in the user interface is the object. An object
is a rectangular area on the screen on which a video source, audio source or other information (clock, viewer,
application, tallies, timer …) can be displayed. A collection of these objects can be positioned on the display and
be saved as a layout. Once a layout is defined it can be displayed on the projection module that is connected to
the HYDRA whenever wanted.
The HYDRA with iSTUDIO is able to process external alarms either from hardware GPIO lines or from software sig-
nals. Closed captions, XDS, Teletext, wide screen signaling and VITC can be detected and displayed. Additionally
an under monitor display (UMD) can be defined and positioned on top or under the video.
Multiple HYDRAS with their connected projection modules can be grouped into a wall. With iSTUDIO the wall can be
operated as a single system rather than every HYDRA module individually.
The figure below shows a Display Wall consisting in three projection modules each connected to one HYDRA.
These HYDRAS are connected via the LAN to a PC that enables the control of the HYDRAS and their output for the
Display Wall by means of the iSTUDIO GUI, available through the web browser. The input sources are connected
directly to the HYDRA units.

Display Device

HYDRA HYDRA HYDRA

Sources Web-browser
Figure 2-1
Setup with 3 HYDRAS

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 2-2
 2. Summary

Hydra
HYDRA is the hardware part of the iSTUDIO system. Different video signals (analog, SDI or HD-SDI, streaming video),
RGB data as well as audio sources (analog, digital, embedded or streamed audio meters) can be connected to a
HYDRA module. Each HYDRA or HYDRA COMPACT controller or HYDRA COMPACT TWIN section monitors up to 60 / 40 / 12
video sources and up to 112 audio sources (or even more with streamed audio meters of NGM-164) depending
on the configuration and displays them on an analog (RGB) or digital (DVI) visualization system. Furthermore the
HYDRA processes GPIO input and different kind of VBI. Closed captions, XDS, wide screen signaling and VITC can be
detected and displayed.
If the number of displayed sources exceeds the capacity of one HYDRA, or if the sources shall be displayed on
multiple displays, multiple HYDRAS can be used. These HYDRAS could easily be operated as one system.
Depending on the system configuration, several SDI video input cards, HD-SDI video input cards, analog video
input cards, streaming video input cards, RGB input cards, digital audio cards, analog audio cards and digital or
analog output cards can be plugged into the box.

Operator PC
For the operator PC any PC can be used that is connected to the same LAN as the HYDRA devices, as long as a
standard web-browser and a Java Virtual Machine are installed on it and it fulfills some minimum system re-
quirements. On the operator PC the GUI of iSTUDIO is accessed. This provides a convenient remote operation of the
HYDRAS from multiple locations.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 2-3
 3. Getting started

3 Getting started
This chapter describes in short the hardware that enables the operation of the iSTUDIO software. It contains in-
structions to install and configure the system. It also introduces the usage of multiple HYDRAS.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 3-1
 3. Getting started

3.1 Hardware devices

iSTUDIO runs on a HYDRA controller and is controlled via the operator PC.

3.1.1 Hydra
The HYDRA controller boots from CD ROM. When connecting to the HYDRA from a PC within the same LAN, the
select mode page of iSTUDIO opens and allows the user to log in on the HYDRA and to operate the system.

3.1.2 Operator PC
The operator PC is used to connect to the HYDRA and by this to the iSTUDIO software. Any PC connected to the
same LAN like the HYDRA fulfilling the below listed minimum-requirements can be used:

Hardware
Processor PC with Pentium II class processor (233 MHz or better)
RAM 64 MB RAM (128 MB recommended)
Screen resolution 1024×768 pixels
Color depth 16 bit
Software
Operating system Windows® 98, Windows NT®, Windows® 2000, Windows® XP
Browser Internet Explorer 5.0 or comparable
Sun Java Runtime Environment 1.4.2.05
Table 3-1
System requirements for the control computer

The iSTUDIO software is best displayed with Internet Explorer; nevertheless it also can be used with any other
web-browser supporting Java 2 (Java version 1.3 or better).

Java runtime environment

On the operator PC the Sun Java Virtual Machine must be installed to provide the appropriate Java runtime envi-
ronment for operation of the iSTUDIO GUI. The installation file is located on the CD R5976593 Manuals &
Supplement. Insert the CD into the operator PC and make a local copy of the file form the CD-ROM \3rd
party\sun\j2re-1_4_2_05-windows-i586-p.exe. Start the installation by a double click on the local
copy of the file. After a short preparation phase the InstallShield Wizard comes up. First you will have to accept
the license agreement and then select the setup type. The Typical setup is sufficient for this purpose. After that
the installation starts and takes some minutes. As soon as clicking on the final Finish button, the Java Virtual
Machine is available on the operator PC.

To install the Java runtime environment you must be logged in on the operator PC with adminis-
trative rights.

3.1.3 Network connection

Make sure the HYDRA and operator PC are connected to the same LAN. Details about connecting the HYDRA to the
LAN can be found in the HYDRA user’s manual.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 3-2
 3. Getting started

3.2 Switching on and off

This section describes how one or more HYDRAS are switched on or off. In addition if a HYDRA is switched on for
the first time the network settings must be configured, please refer to section 3.2.3 Adjusting a Hydra to the LAN.

3.2.1 Connecting from a user PC to the Hydra

Switch on the HYDRA as explained in the HYDRA user’s manual. Take care that the iSTUDIO CD-ROM is inserted in the
CD-ROM drive. When the startup screen appears the HYDRA is ready for operation and a connection from an op-
erator PC to the HYDRA can be set. The default startup screen displays in the upper left corner the IP address of
the HYDRA.

Figure 3-1
HYDRA startup screen

Open a web browser on your PC. Type the IP address of the HYDRA into the address bar of the web browser and
click the enter-key.

Figure 3-2
Connecting to HYDRA using a web-browser

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 3-3
 3. Getting started

Once connected to the HYDRA, the initial select mode screen of iSTUDIO will appear in the browser.

Figure 3-3
iSTUDIO select mode

Click the Admin button or the User button in the upper right corner to log in, depending on your privileges and
intention.
After this a dialog appears that asks, if you want to trust the signed Barco Java applet. This applet is only re-
quired for the functioning of the show viewer command, please refer to section 5.6.9 Show viewer. We recom-
mend confirming it one time with the Always button. This will allow you to use the complete iSTUDIO functional-
ity without asking at each login for confirmation.

Figure 3-4
Security warning – Java applet

If you confirmed the Barco applet with Always, but later on you want to disable its usage then
simply open the Control Panel (click Start -> Settings -> Control Panel). In the Control Panel se-
lect Java Plug-in, this opens the Java Plug-in Control Panel. Go to the Certificates tab and select
the Signed Applet button. The Barco applet is in the list. Just select it and click the Remove but-
ton. After doing so you will again be asked at each login for confirmation.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 3-4
 3. Getting started

Now the Login window is displayed.

Figure 3-5
Login window

Into the Password box insert the required password and click Login or press the Enter key. Now the iSTUDIO
software can be used. The factory set passwords are:

Administrator: admin
User: user
Table 3-2
Factory set passwords

Switching on multiple Hydras

Switch on all HYDRAS with the power button at the front of the HYDRA. Start the iSTUDIO software by connecting to
one of the HYDRAS with the web-browser, as explained above. Just one HYDRA can be indicated in the address bar
of the browser, but this enables to operate each HYDRA that belongs to the same wall. Within the iSTUDIO software
it can easily be switched between all related HYDRAS, please refer to section 6.2.1 Modules.

3.2.2 Switching off

Before the HYDRA can be switched off, it must be halted. To halt a module select Halt module from the Module
menu or select Halt wall from the Wall menu, see section 5.3.2 Module control and 5.2.5 Wall Control. This command
halts one or all HYDRAS. As soon as the HYDRA stops sending an output signal, it can be switched off, please refer
to the HYDRA user’s manual.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 3-5
 3. Getting started

3.2.3 Adjusting a Hydra to the LAN

Before the HYDRA is connected to your LAN, its network settings have to be adapted accordingly. If the HYDRA is
already configured to your location you can skip this section.
For the configuration you need a crossed network cable to connect a PC to the HYDRA. Please follow the steps
below.
• First consult your network administrator to get a valid IP address and hostname.
• Disconnect your PC from the LAN.
• Configure the network settings of the PC in a way that it is suitable for the network settings of the HYDRA, i.e.
use the same net mask as the HYDRA and an IP address within the same address range. Below you find the
factory set network settings of the HYDRA:

hostname: hydra
IP address: 150.158.183.146
net mask 255.255.0.0
Table 3-3
Factory set network settings

• Connect the network connectors of the PC and of the single board computer of the HYDRA with a crossed
network cable.
• Switch on the HYDRA and connect to it, please refer to section 3.2.1 Connecting from a user PC to the Hydra above.
Take care to log in as administrator; you need this to be able to change the network settings of the HYDRA.
• As soon as the iSTUDIO software is operable you can change the network settings of the HYDRA:
Open the Module setup dialog box with the setup module command in the Modules menu. On the
General tab you can enter a user defined name for the HYDRA and, if multiple HYDRAS are used in one wall, a
wall name. With the Network tab the network settings of the HYDRA can be set. Please refer to section 5.3.4
Setup module for a description of these settings.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 3-6
 3. Getting started

• Reboot the HYDRA to make the changes become effective. This can be done by the command reboot module
from the Module menu, please refer to section 5.3.2 Module control.
• Disconnect the crossed network cable from the HYDRA and connect the HYDRA to your companies LAN.
• Readjust the network settings of your PC.

If you have to adjust multiple HYDRAS configure them one after the other in the way explained
above.
Take care to assign to each of it a unique hostname and IP address!

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 3-7
 4. Basics

4 Basics
This chapter explains the principles of the iSTUDIO GUI and gives a short introduction in the use of iSTUDIO. An ex-
tensive reference to the iSTUDIO software can be found in the chapters 5 Menu and toolbar and 6 Further GUI elements.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 4-1
 4. Basics

4.1 Quick guide to iStudio

This section gives an introduction in the use of iSTUDIO. It explains the user interface and provides a guide to cre-
ate a first layout and display it on the connected projection module. It is not meant to be complete. Only the
most common actions are explained to give an idea how iSTUDIO can be used. An extensive reference to the iSTU-
DIO software can be found in the next two chapters. They will answer remaining questions.

4.1.1 User interface

The user interface of the iSTUDIO software consists out of up to eleven elements:

1 2

3
4

8
5

7
9

10 11

Log in buttons
The Admin [1] and User [2] buttons in the upper right corner serve to easily log in as administrator or as user,
see section 6.1 Administrator / user mode.

Menu
The menu [3] on top of the user interface provides access to all of the functionality of iSTUDIO. The handling of
the menu is explained in detail in the reference in section 5 Menu and toolbar.

Toolbar
The buttons of the toolbar [4] make iSTUDIO quick and easy to operate. They are located under the menu. Some
of these buttons are toggle buttons to switch from one state to another. They are marked with a red triangle in
the lower right corner if switched on. Most of these buttons are a shortcut to a command of the menu, see sec-
tion 5 Menu and toolbar. Many commands can also be accessed by means of a shortcut key, see section 5.1
Overview of shortcut keys and toolbar buttons.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 4-2
 4. Basics

Shortcut menu
With a right click into the work area or on module-, wall layout- or layout-items in the tree a shortcut menu [5]
appears. It offers quick access the most important commands in this context.
In the work area this is to switch layouts and to edit the selected object and the source assigned to it. Functional-
ity which is made available with it is explained in the sections 5.3 Modules and source und 5.6 Object.
Within the tree the shortcut menu enables access to actions for wall and modules, wall layout and layouts. This
functionality is explained in the sections 5.2 Wall, 5.3 Modules and sources and 5.4 Layout.

Work area
The work area [6] in the center and right of the user interface serves to create, rework and inspect layouts. A
grid with a variable number of cells can be used to easily position objects. The functionality of the work area is
implicitly described in the sections 5.5 Group (selection), 5.6 Object and 5.7 Grid.

Display area
The display area [7] on the lower left shows the currently selected module as it is displayed. It displays size and
position of the objects, and the state of the source (color code). The display area does not serve to edit layouts.
Layouts can be edited in the work area. After editing, it can be updated to the module. It is also possible to auto
update the content of the work area to the display area, see section 5.3.1 Updating work- and display area.
If the objects that are displayed are already saved as layout, then the name of the layout is in addition shown on
the display area. If a layout with unsaved changes is displayed, then an asterisk * is appended to the layouts
name.

Tree
The tree [8] is between the toolbar and the display area. It lists the connected hardware like HYDRA modules and
the sources available on the connected module sources. Furthermore all user-defined layouts and object tem-
plates as well as scripts are listed. The tree allows to easily select modules and layouts or to assign once defined
properties to newly created objects just by a click on the respective entry. A color code shows which items in the
list are selected or active. For the tree there are two different views available, see section 6.2 Tree.

Wall alarms
The wall alarms list [9] can be toggled on and off, please see also section 5.2.2 Wall alarms area. If displayed, it is
located between the work area and the messagebar. If the wall alarms are not displayed, the work area reaches
down to the messagebar. The alarm list is a quick and easy tool to handle alarms.

Statebar
The state bar [10] provides information of which module is currently used, which layout is loaded on that mod-
ule, how many objects are on that layout, etc. Please refer to section 6.3.1 Statebar.

Messagebar
The messagebar [11] on the lower right side informs the user about the current action on the user interface. If a
dialog box is opened, it displays its title. As well it informs about mouse actions on the work area, see section
6.3.2 Messagebar.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 4-3
 4. Basics

Dialog boxes
Dialog boxes are used to show information and to allow users to input or change data and settings. Two types of
dialog boxes can be opened:
• Normal Dialog boxes to control and insert data
The iSTUDIO GUI is grayed while such a dialog box is opened and can not be accessed unless the dialog box
gets closed. The messagebar displays the title of the dialog box
• Dialog boxes to start a wall scenario or a wall script
The dialog box runs as an individual application. The iSTUDIO GUI remains operable and the title of the dialog
box is not displayed in the messagebar of iSTUDIO. Though it is displayed in the Windows taskbar.

Movable separators
There are movable separators between the major interface elements. Each separator can be dragged with the
mouse to change the size of the interface element. By clicking on one of the two arrowheads, the area on one
side of it can be completely hidden and the other side is expanded to its maximum size.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 4-4
 4. Basics

4.1.2 Creating objects

Objects play a central role in iSTUDIO. They are visual containers that can display various types of information.

Creating objects

Create a new object on the work area by pressing the new object button . The new object will be dis-
played in the upper left corner of the work area and will not have specific properties. Clicking the new object
button multiple times creates multiple new objects. They are stacked one on the other in the upper left corner.

Arranging objects
There are multiple ways to size and position objects:
• The object can be dragged with the mouse anywhere within the work area. Its size can be changed by drag-
ging a border or corner of the object. Information about position and size is displayed in the message bar
while moved.
• In the Edit object dialog box size and position can be indicated in pixels.

• The button enlarges the object to the size of the next bigger grid cells.

• The sizes the object to one grid cell.

• The button enlarges the object to fullscreen.

• With the and button the stacking order of the object relative to the other objects on the work
area can be changed.

• The toggle button fixed movement adjusts an object to the grid, if moved. The red corner indicates
that fixed movement is active.

• The toggle button lock objects serves to prevent moving the objects accidentally with the mouse. The
red corner indicates that lock objects is active.

• With the undo button and the redo button the last 20 actions can be revoked and restored
again.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 4-5
 4. Basics

4.1.3 Defining the object properties

Double click on an object to open the Edit object dialog box. Within this dialog box all properties of this object
can be set.
Most important is to specify on the first tab the type of the object. Video, Audio, Text, UMD, Tally, Logo, Clock,
Timer, Stopwatch, Alarm, Viewer or Application can be selected. The type dependant properties must be set
on the Properties tab. Here you can select the video source, if you have an object of type video. Please refer
also to section 5.6.4 Edit object….
In the work area, the object type and size are displayed in the top left corner of the object. For video objects the
source name is also displayed between brackets. When creating a new video object the first available source will
automatically be linked to it.

Most of the properties of an object can be saved. Click the red save object button to do this. Object proper-
ties can be assigned to another object by multiple ways:
• Once saved, the object properties are available in the tree structure in the Objects folder. If you select an
object on the work area, and click on an object name in the tree, the saved properties are assigned to the
selected object.

• The cut object button copies most of the properties of the selected object and deletes the object.

• The copy object button copies most of the properties of the selected object without deleting it.

• With the paste object button the copied properties can be assigned to another object.

• Alternatively the paste new object button creates a new object containing the copied properties.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 4-6
 4. Basics

4.1.4 Group functionality

To ease editing, objects can be grouped to a selection, see section 5.5 Group (selection). This is achieved by switch-

ing on the group selection toggle button . Now each object on the work area can be added to the group by
a double click on it. A selection allows moving all objects by just moving one of its objects (provided that fixed
movement is off). Objects contained in the group are marked with a small square in the lower right corner.
• Objects can be added to (and removed from) the selection by a double click.

• The button adds all objects from the selection.

• The button removes all objects to the selection.

• The button allows drawing a rectangle with the mouse. All objects, which are inside off the rectangle
or on its borders, change their state of selection.

If group selection is on, a double click on an object does no longer open the edit object dialog box.

The dialog box can be opened by the menu bar or with the edit object button

When a group selection is made, the selected objects can be operated like a single object. The respective buttons
are marked with a G in the lower right corner.

4.1.5 Grid
The grid helps to align objects on the screen. The number of grid lines can be increased or decreased using the

buttons for horizontal grid lines, vertical grid lines or horizontal and vertical
grid lines.

4.1.6 Displaying objects on the display area and projection module

Up to now the objects are just visible on the work area.

• With the button you can display these objects to the display area and hereby also on the connected
projection module.

• If you want to display the arrangement of objects of the display area on the work area the button can
be pressed.

• The toggle buttons and activate or deactivate an auto update. Changes on the work area are
automatically updated to the display area and projection module.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 4-7
 4. Basics

4.1.7 Layouts
A layout is a collection of objects with their associated properties. Layouts can be saved for later use. Please refer
to section 5.4 Layout.

• A layout can be saved with the blue save layout button .

• The available layouts are listed in the tree. Click on a layout name to load that layout on the work area.

• With the new layout button the work area is cleared and a new layout can be started.

• To display a layout on the projection module it first must be loaded. Then the button must be pressed.

4.1.8 Wall layouts

Using multiple HYDRAS with multiple projection modules, an arrangement of layouts can be made to assign each
HYDRA a defined layout. Such a wall layout can be created with the Wall menu -> New wall layout ..., see also
section 5.2.1 Wall Layout. The command Load wall layout ... in the same menu or a wall layout item of the tree
can be used to bring a wall layout to the projection modules.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 4-8
 4. Basics

4.2 Additional video related input

The HYDRA and iSTUDIO is able to detect and display video related information such as closed caption (CC),
teletext (TT), extended data structure (XDS), vertical interval time code (VITC), wide screen signaling (WSS) and
video index information coding (VLI) and embedded audio. Furthermore GPIO’s can be processed and LTC can be
used for genlock. Under monitor displays (UMD) can be displayed in video windows. The following sections ex-
plain the way the respective input is used by iSTUDIO. Please refer to the HYDRA user’s manual, to see which input
card supports which of the below features.

4.2.1 Closed caption

Closed captions (CC) are captions that are hidden in the video signal. The HYDRA can detect closed captions and
display it in the video window. An indicator can be activated to show, if a closed caption is available or not. On
the Properties tab – VBI subtab of the Edit object dialog box, see section 5.6.4 Edit object…, one of the closed
caption channels can be selected for displaying and the other above mentioned settings can be set.
When displaying CC please consider the following:
• Audio bars are always placed on top of the CC information.
• The video window must be sufficiently big to display closed captions.
• If the video window is small, all italic CC text is displayed as plain text.
• Some seldom-used features of CC like flashing and special character sets are not supported.

4.2.2 Teletext
Teletext subtitles of a video source and an indictor showing the availability of teletext can be displayed. Please
see section 5.6.4 Edit object… (Properties tab – VBI subtab).

4.2.3 Vertical interval time code

The VITC signal of a video source can be displayed if a signal is available. Please see section 5.6.4 Edit object…
(Properties tab – VBI subtab).

4.2.4 WSS, VLI, AFD and ETSI

If available in the signal, WSS and VLI information can be displayed in the video window, see section 5.6.4 Edit
object… (Properties tab – WSS subtab). AFD or ETSI lines can be indicated and displayed. WSS and VLI require the
UK region to be selected in the Module properties dialog box, see section 5.3.4 Setup module.

4.2.5 Tally
A tally is a status indicator that can visualize one of many system states. Some examples are alarm visualization,
hardware GPIO state, software trigger (XML command), etc. Two tallies can be displayed per video window. In
addition a tally object is able to display up to 16 freely selectable tallies. Please refer to section 5.6.4 Edit object…
(Edit object dialog box – Properties tab (of a video object) – Tally subtab and Edit object dialog box – Tally tab
(of a tally object)). The configuration of the tallies is explained in section 5.3.7 Setup source (Setup Source dialog
box – Tally tab).

4.2.6 XDS
XDS information contains the program name and the program rating. This information can be displayed. For this
purpose the second line of the UMD is used. Therefore XDS must be activated and the UMD must be configured
respectively, see section 5.6.4 Edit object….

4.2.7 UMD
The UMD can be used to display a name on a label of the video source, see section 5.6.4 Edit object… (Edit object
– UMD tab).

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 4-9
 4. Basics

4.3 System performance optimization

4.3.1 Performance
iSTUDIO is, just as any other product, susceptible to performance limitations imposed by the different technologies
used. Practical experience has shown that iSTUDIO will perform well under almost all circumstances. Factors that
have been recognized to influence system load to a high extend are the amount of API calls and the fonts that
are used.

API calls
If API calls are used, we advise to not exceed their number to more than 20 calls per second and to carefully
select the used API calls.

In case of doubt contact the Barco support for further information on which approach to follow for
achieving the best performance possible, please refer to section 10.1 Hotline.

True Type fonts

The extensive use of TrueType fonts is at the expense of the performance of the system, as True Type fonts re-
quire more processing power than other fonts. We recommend to take this into consideration when selecting
fonts.

Network load
When multiple HYDRA modules work together in a wall configuration, make sure that the network segment to
which the modules are connected is not loaded too much.

4.3.2 Japanese fonts

To show Japanese fonts in the iSTUDIO GUI Windows as well as the Internet Explorer must be set to support Japa-
nese characters.
To display Japanese characters by the HYDRA, in the dialogs of the user interface, where text is edited the font
Mincho or Gothic must be selected!

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 4-10
 5. Menu and toolbar

5 Menu and toolbar

The menu bar provides access to almost all the possible operations within iSTUDIO. Commands that are often used
can also be accessed using the buttons on the tool bar. A small icon on the left of the menu entry on the respec-
tive command will indicate this. The most important commands are also accessible by means of shortcut keys.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-1
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.1 Overview of shortcut keys and toolbar buttons

Access to almost all operations is provided by the menu; nevertheless, often used commands can also be ac-
cessed by the buttons of the toolbar or by the shortcut keys.
The following table lists these buttons and the available shortcut keys, with a reference to the section where
they are explained in detail.

Button Shortcut Description section

key
general
undo 5.6.1 Undo and redo

redo 5.6.1 Undo and redo

Module
Ctrl+A auto update active/not active 5.3.1 Updating work- and display area

Ctrl+U update layout 5.3.1 Updating work- and display area

Ctrl+G get layout 5.3.1 Updating work- and display area

Layout
Ctrl+N new layout: clears the work area 5.4.1 Module layout

save layout 5.4.1 Module layout

Positioning Objects
Ctrl+F move object to the front 5.6.6 Stacking order of an object

Ctrl+B move object to the back 5.6.6 Stacking order of an object

Ctrl+T Fit object to the grid 5.6.8 Object sizing

Ctrl+S Size object to grid 5.6.8 Object sizing

Alt+S Size object to screen 5.6.8 Object sizing

Ctrl+H Hide/unhide object 5.6.7 Hide/unhide object

Source
Alt+F freeze/unfreeze source: refers to 5.3.8 Freeze, unfreeze source
the source of the selected object

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-2
 5. Menu and toolbar

Edit Objects
Ctrl+O create a new object 5.6.2 New object and fill grid

save the properties of the selected 5.6.3 Load, save or delete objects
object
Ctrl+E edit the properties of the selected 5.6.4 Edit object…
object
Ctrl+X copy the properties of the selected 5.6.5 Cut, copy, paste and paste new object
object and delete the object properties
Ctrl+C copy the properties of the selected 5.6.5 Cut, copy, paste and paste new object
object properties
Ctrl+V paste the copied properties in the 5.6.5 Cut, copy, paste and paste new object
selected object properties
Alt+V create a new object with the cop- 5.6.5 Cut, copy, paste and paste new object
ied properties properties
Grid
decrease grid by one cell in x- and 5.7.9 Increasing and decreasing the grid
y-direction
increase grid by one cell in x- and 5.7.9 Increasing and decreasing the grid
y-direction
decrease grid by one cell in x- 5.7.9 Increasing and decreasing the grid
direction
increase grid by one cell in x- 5.7.9 Increasing and decreasing the grid
direction
decrease grid by one cell in y- 5.7.9 Increasing and decreasing the grid
direction
increase grid by one cell in y- 5.7.9 Increasing and decreasing the grid
direction
Ctrl+2 2 by 2 grid 5.7.8 Standard grid configurations
Ctrl+3 3 by 3 grid 5.7.8 Standard grid configurations
Ctrl+4 4 by 4 grid 5.7.8 Standard grid configurations
Ctrl+5 5 by 5 grid 5.7.8 Standard grid configurations
Moving Objects and Wall Alarms
Ctrl+M fixed movement active/not active: 5.7.1 Fixed movement
objects are aligned to the grid
when moved
Ctrl+L lock objects active/not active 5.7.2 Lock objects

display wall alarm messages in the 5.2.2 Wall alarms area

work area

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-3
 5. Menu and toolbar

Selection (Group)
Alt+G group selection active/not active 5.5.1 Enable group selection

Alt+A select all objects 5.5.2 Selecting objects

Alt+U deselect all objects 5.5.2 Selecting objects

Alt+O select objects by means of the 5.5.2 Selecting objects

mouse
load objects properties to all ob- 5.5.3 Load, cut and paste object properties
jects of the selection
delete the selected objects 5.5.3 Load, cut and paste object properties

paste the properties from the cop- 5.5.3 Load, cut and paste object properties
ied or cut object to the selected
objects
move selected objects to the front 5.5.4 Stacking order of objects

move selected objects to the back 5.5.4 Stacking order of objects

hide/unhide selected objects 5.5.5 Hide/unhide objects

freeze sources of the selected 5.5.6 Freeze, unfreeze sources

objects
Table 5-1
Toolbar buttons and shortcut keys

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-4
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.2 Wall
By means of the Wall menu, the grid toolbar and the shortcut menus, which appear when clicking on the mod-
ules main entry and on the Wall layouts entries in the tree, the wall settings can be accomplished and general
administration can be done.
If multiple HYDRAS are used to control multiple projection modules all these HYDRA modules can be controlled by
one iSTUDIO terminal. Therefore the layouts can be combined to a wall layout, which assigns to each projection
module a layout. A wall layout is herewith a combination of layouts on multiple projection modules. Also all
HYDRAS of a wall can be controlled commonly (halt, reboot, reset, setup time, etc.).

Figure 5-1
Wall menu (left), grid toolbar (top right) and context menus (bottom right): Modules, Wall layouts and Wall layout

5.2.1 Wall Layout

New wall layout…

With the command New wall layout a wall layout is created. It opens the Create wall layout dialog box.

Figure 5-2
Create wall layout dialog box

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-5
 5. Menu and toolbar

A list with all modules appendant to the wall can be found in the Module column. The Load layout checkbox
must be selected for each module where a layout shall be assigned. If the Load layout checkbox is not selected
the respective module becomes not updated when a wall layout is loaded. In the Layout list finally an existing
layout can be assigned to a module.
After assigning the layouts as desired the wall layout can be saved, therefore click the Save button. This opens
the Save wall layout dialog. In brackets in the title bar of the dialog the available size on the flash disk in KB is
indicated. Either enter the name of the wall layout into the Filename box or click on a filename in the list to
overwrite this existing wall layout. Click OK to confirm.

Figure 5-3
Save wall layout dialog box

Edit wall layout…

Already existing wall layouts can also be edited. This is accomplished with the Edit wall layout command. The
Edit wall layout dialog box shows a list of all wall layouts. After selecting one wall layout and clicking OK, the
same dialog as under the New wall layout appears.
If the currently displayed wall layout is edited nevertheless it must anew be loaded, to display the changes.

Load wall layout…

With the Load wall layout command a wall layout can be selected and displayed on the projection modules. The
layout of the single modules can be seen in the display area. It can be switched between the different modules
by clicking on the respective module in the modules tree.

Delete wall layout…

The Delete wall layout command enables to delete a wall layout. If the actually displayed wall layout is deleted
nevertheless the same information is displayed until another wall layout or layout is loaded.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-6
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.2.2 Wall alarms area

If you switch the wall alarm toggle button on, the work area is reduced and the wall alarms area is dis-
played below it. The wall alarms area displays a list with all alarms on all connected modules.

Figure 5-4
Wall alarm list toggled on (left) and off (right)

The list contains the state of an alarm, the module name, source name, alarmtype and start and stop date and
time of the occurrence of the alarm.
On the right side of the wall alarms list there are five buttons. If the buzzer toggle button on the left side on top
is switched on, it activates a warning sound in case of an uncleared alarm. The button on the right side on top
flashes red, when an alarm occurs. Clicking it stops the button from flashing, without clearing the alarm.

The buzzer and the red flashing button can only be activated by sources, which have the ring
buzzer property in the Sources properties dialog on the Alarm Tab enabled, please refer also to
section 5.3.7 Setup source!

Press the Clear button to notify the selected alarm or press the Clear all button to notify all alarms. The alarm
list is automatically updated, nevertheless the Refresh button serves to update changes of modules or sources
and to sort the alarms for a better overview. The following colors are used to indicate the state of an alarm:
• Red: the error is active, e.g. there is no video or RGB signal detected at a certain source
• Green: the error is solved but not cleared, e.g. a video or RGB signal exists again at that source
• Orange: the error is cleared. This is a notification of a single error (press the Clear button) or of all errors
(press the Clear all button).

Figure 5-5
List of wall alarms

Alarms related to video or RGB sources can also be displayed by a flashing window of the respec-
tive video object, see section 5.6.4 Edit object… (Properties – Error).

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-7
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.2.3 Wall scenario

The Wall scenario command enables to display various wall layouts in a user-defined chronology. The Wall
layouts list provides all wall layouts. With the Add button a selected wall layout can be added to the Scenario
list. The Cut button removes a selected item from the Scenario list. The New button clears the whole Scenario
list. The time each wall layout is displayed can be inserted in seconds into the Wait box.
The Start and the Stop buttons start and stop the scenario. The Close button closes the Wall scenario dialog box.
If a scenario was running at this time it is stopped as well.

Figure 5-6
Wall scenario dialog box

After starting a scenario the Wall scenario dialog box must be left open as long as the scenario shall
be displayed!
Nevertheless the iSTUDIO software can be operated. The Wall scenario dialog box hides in the back-
ground. It can be brought to the foreground again either by clicking on its icon in the Windows task
bar or by pressing the shortcut key Alt Tab as long as the dialog box is selected.
Wall scenarios can not be saved. To save a sequence of wall layouts a Wall script or the HYDRA open
protocol can be used, see below.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-8
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.2.4 Wall script

Wall scripts provide further functionality to control the display of HYDRA and the HYDRA itself. Wall scripts can be
started with the Wall script dialog box. The same functionality as the scripting language provides the XML based
open protocol of HYDRA, which is more convenient than the scripting language and will be supported in further
releases of iSTUDIO.

Notice that scripts will not be supported in future releases of iSTUDIO. We recommend to use the
XML based open protocol of HYDRA instead.

A reference to the HYDRA scripting language can be found in chapter 12 Appendix B – Hydra scripting language
definition v1.0. Usage of the XML based open protocol is content of the chapter 11 Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol.
The Wall script command opens the Wall script dialog box. A script can either be newly typed into the Script
box or an existing script can be opened with the Load button. Scripts can be saved by means of the Save button.
It opens the Save script dialog box. The script can be saved under a new name or an existing script file can be
overwritten. The New button clears the Script window.
The Start button starts the script that is currently displayed in the Script box. Messages that arise from the script
are displayed in the Messages box. Status messages of the script are displayed in the Output box. To clear the
display of the Messages and Output boxes the Clear button can be used. Pressing the Stop button interrupts the
script. The Close button closes the Wall script dialog box and stops also the script.

After starting a script you must leave the Wall script dialog box open as long as you want the script
to run!
Nevertheless the iSTUDIO software can be operated. The Wall script dialog box hides in the back-
ground. It can be brought to the foreground again either by clicking on its icon in the Windows task
bar or by pressing the shortcut key Alt Tab as long as the dialog box is selected.

Figure 5-7
Wall script dialog box

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-9
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.2.5 Wall Control

The following commands are applied to all HYDRA devices of the wall. Please refer to section 5.3.2 Module control
for an instruction how to control a single HYDRA.

Halt wall
With the Halt wall command all HYDRAS belonging to the wall can be halted. A warning dialog appears. After
confirming this dialog the shutdown screen is displayed while halting. When halted the display is just black and
the HYDRAS can be switched off, please refer to the HYDRA user’s manual.

Reboot wall
The Reboot wall command halts all HYDRA devices of the wall and reboots them. This includes a reset of the
software and all hardware components. The warning dialog must be confirmed, before the wall is rebooted.
The command must be applied after changes of Name or Wallname within the dialog 5.3.4 Setup module to make
them become effective. If changes have been made for one module it is sufficient to apply the command
Reboot module to the respective HYDRA module instead.

Be aware that the connection between the GUI and the HYDRA modules is interrupted while re-
booting. You will have to reconnect to the HYDRA when the wall has rebooted!

Reset wall
The Reset wall command resets the software and all hardware components of the HYDRA devices of the wall,
except the single board computer. The warning dialog must be confirmed, before the wall is reset. If changes
have been made for only one module, it is sufficient to apply the command Reset module to the respective
HYDRA module instead.

Reset Software (Wall)

The Reset Software (Wall) command resets the software of the HYDRA devices of the wall. During the software
reset, each module keeps on displaying its part on the display wall.
The command must be applied after changes to make them become effective. The following changes are con-
cerned:
• changed content of the folders logo and anim, please refer to section 8.1 Data structure and data access (reset
software is required to update the file lists, e.g. when selecting the logo of a logo object,
• for some NTP synchronization operations, please see section 5.2.7 Time setup.
If changes have been made for one module it is sufficient to apply the command Reset software (Module) to
the respective HYDRA module instead.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-10
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.2.6 User settings

Setup password…
The Setup password command opens the Setup password dialog box. By means of this dialog box the pass-
words of the administrator and of the user can be changed.
This feature is only accessible for the Administrator.

Figure 5-8
Setup password dialog box

Setup user mode…

With the Setup user mode dialog box the privileges of the user can be set and changed and the default lan-
guage after program start in user mode can be chosen.
This feature is only accessible for the administrator.

Figure 5-9
Setup user mode dialog box

The options of the Setup user mode dialog box have the following meaning:

Option Meaning
Default language default language of the menu for the user mode.
Enable fast view tree The tree can be switched from standard view tree to fast view tree.
Please refer to section 6.2 Tree for the differences between both views.
The GUI has to be restarted to make this setting effective.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-11
 5. Menu and toolbar

save items allows to save objects, layouts and wall layouts

delete saved items allows to delete saved objects, layouts and wall layouts
halt and reboot a module or wall allows halting, rebooting, resetting single modules or walls
reset a module or wall allows resetting single modules or walls
setup module allows configuring modules
setup source allows configuring sources
setup module or wall time allows to set the time of a HYDRA
setup colors allows to change colors
clear all alarms allows to clear alarms
Table 5-2
Options of the Setup user mode dialog box

Setup colors…
The iSTUDIO software provides a collection of 14 predefined colors in up to 10 shades and 9 colors (user1, user2,
…, user9) for user definition. These colors can be assigned to the background of a layout or to the background
and borders of objects, see the sections 5.4.2 Setup layout and 5.6.4 Edit object…. Furthermore there are colors which
are reserved for specific purposes, e.g. to indicate tally states or the amplitude of the audio bars.
With the Setup colors dialog box all these colors can be changed. The red, green and blue portion of the color
can be adjusted in steps from 0 to 255 either by
• inserting the values directly in the respective text boxes,
• moving the sliders with the mouse or
• clicking with the mouse on the bars and changing the color values in steps of one unit.

Figure 5-10
Setup colors dialog box

The mixed color can directly be viewed in the Definition box on the top of the dialog. To make changes in the
color definition effective all related HYDRA modules must be rebooted. The shades of a color are taken linearly.
The following system and user colors are available:

colors number of shades

white, black, user1, user2, ... user9, purpose related colors 1
red, green, blue, yellow, magenta, cyan, orange, purple, brown, pink, gold 5
gray 10
Table 5-3
Available colors in iSTUDIO

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-12
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.2.7 Time setup

Each HYDRA module has an internal clock and thus for each HYDRA module the time can be set. Furthermore the
HYDRA modules can be synchronized with each other via an NTP synchronization mechanism. Finally a time zone
can be specified. With the Setup time dialog box these configurations can be set. It is opened with the com-
mand Setup time.

Figure 5-11
Setup time dialog

Time Setup – Wall

On the Time setup tab there is first the principle choice between wall and module configuration mode. Selecting
the Wall mode enables to choose one time configuration for the whole wall. If the NTP Synchronization Button
is not selected, only the manual configuration is available. With the NTP Synchronization Button selected the
modes NTP, NTP Date and LTCVITC are available. With the modes NTP and LTCVITC the modules are furthermore
also internally synchronized with each other via NTP. These two modes or selecting NTP Date for all modules
enables to have for all HYDRA modules always the same time.
With the manual configuration the HYDRA modules are only synchronized each time the time configuration is
done, but afterwards the individual clocks might diverge with growing time.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-13
 5. Menu and toolbar

Time Setup – Wall – NTP

Select NTP from the Sync mode list to synchronize the wall with external NTP servers via the NTP synchroniza-
tion mechanism. Select in the Modules list all HYDRA modules that shall synchronize with one or multiple external
NTP servers. Modules not selected in this list will internally synchronize to the externally synchronized modules,
which result in the whole wall is synchronized.
Under NTP server all IP addresses of the external NTP servers must be listed. Click Add to open the Add NTP
server dialog to add another NTP server to the list, enter its IP address in the text box and click OK. To remove
an NTP server from the list, select it with a mouse click and click the Delete button.

Figure 5-12
Setup time dialog – NTP configuration (detail) and Add NTP server dialog

To check the synchronization, an alarm can be configured to report if the HYDRA module lost its NTP synchroniza-
tion, please refer to section 5.3.4 Setup module (Alarm tab). It is helpful to have such an NTP alarm for each HYDRA
module, if the sync mode is NTP (Only NTP not NTP Date).

To initially start NTP synchronization a defined procedure must be carried out.

Once the HYDRA modules are synchronized with each other, special actions have to be taken, if an-
other external NTP server should be used or if you used LTC/VITC configuration before.
Please see the list of procedures below:

First time starting NTP synchronization:

• Enter the NTP settings in the Setup time dialog, see above.
• Apply the command Reset Software (Wall), see section 5.2.5 Wall Control.
• If you have configured NTP alarms for each HYDRA, they will be active.
Wait until all HYDRA modules that are configured for external synchronization are synchronized. You see this
when the NTP alarms of these modules are no longer active.
• Apply the command Reset software (Wall) again, now all other HYDRA modules will as well synchronize.
Also their NTP alarms will be deactivated.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-14
 5. Menu and toolbar

Changing the NTP server:

• Change the NTP settings in the Setup time dialog.
• EITHER switch of the previously configured NTP server.
• THEN wait until the HYDRA modules loose there synchronization. (You see this when the NTP alarm of the
modules becomes active)
• THEN within about 5 minutes after the alarms appeared, apply the command Reset software (Wall), see
section 5.2.5 Wall Control.
• OR apply the command Reboot wall, see section 5.2.5 Wall Control.
Changing the synchronization type of a wall from LTC/VITC to NTP synchronization:
• Change the synchronization settings in the Setup time dialog to NTP synchronization
• Apply the command Reboot wall, see section 5.2.5 Wall Control.

Time Setup – Wall – NTP Date

With the sync mode NTP Date also an external NTP server is used to get the current time, but the synchroniza-
tion itself is not driven by an NTP daemon. Instead the HYDRA modules selected in the Modules list are actively
asking after each time interval (as specified in Refresh (s)) the NTP server indicated with IP address for the
current time. Only the HYDRA modules selected in the Modules list are synchronized. There is no internal synchro-
nization of the modules between each other.

With the NTP Date mode, synchronization loops are not taking place as often as expedient. There-
fore we recommend using the NTP mode instead. This enables to accurately synchronize to a re-
mote NTP server.

Figure 5-13
Setup time dialog – NTP Date configuration (detail)

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-15
 5. Menu and toolbar

Time Setup – Wall – LTCVITC

Apart from NTP signals also an LTC (longitudinal time code) or VITC (vertical interval time code) signal can be
used for the external synchronization of the time of the HYDRA wall. Select in the Modules list all HYDRA modules
that shall synchronize with an LTC or VITC signal. Modules not selected in this list will internally synchronize via
NTP to the externally synchronized modules, which result in the whole wall is synchronized.
The signals can be inserted via the D15 connector of the overlay input card. Alternatively also the VITC signal of a
video source can be used. The mode list specifies whether LTC or VITC and in which order they shall be used.
• LTC: Use only LTC
• VITC: Use only VITC
• LTC + VITC: Use LTC if available, else use VITC
• VITC + LTC: Use VITC if available, else use LTC
For VITC sources additionally their video type PAL or NTSC must be indicated. In the Synchronization via section
select Overlay, if the source with the synchronization signal is applied to the overlay input card; select Source if
the VITC of a video source that applies to a video input card shall be used and indicate the respective number of
the input.

If multiple HYDRA modules are used for LTC/VITC synchronization then the source that carries the
time signal must be applied at the same position (same source number on all concerned modules
or on all modules via the overlay input)!

Figure 5-14
Setup time dialog – LTC/VITC configuration (detail)

With LTC/VITC synchronization also the configuration of an NTP alarm for each module is advisable because the
modules are synchronized with each other via NTP; please refer to section 5.3.4 Setup module (Alarm tab).

VITC and LTC might allow jumps of the submitted time of maximal 17 minutes. This will bring the
system partially out of sync. A HYDRA wall will need about 15 minutes to get synchronized again.
The following procedure helps to solve that problem faster:

Using LTC/VITC and a time jump occurs:

• Wait until all HYDRA modules report an NTP alarm.
• Apply the command Reset Software (Wall), see section 5.2.5 Wall Control.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-16
 5. Menu and toolbar

Time Setup – Wall – manual configuration

The manual configuration enables to set the time for the clocks of all HYDRA modules to the date and time speci-
fied in the text boxes of the Manual time configuration dialog. Pressing the Get button shows the current time
and date of that HYDRA that is used for the connection to the operator PC. Instead of the Get command, data and
time can be entered manually.
Pressing the Set button sets the time and date currently displayed in this dialog to all HYDRA modules.
The HYDRA modules are only synchronized with each other in that moment where the Set button is pressed; later
on their clocks are no more synchronized.

Figure 5-15
Setup time dialog – manual configuration

If the wall or a module has already been operated in a different time configuration mode (NTP,
NTP-date or LTC/VITC), then please perform the following steps in the order given below, before
switching to manual time configuration:
• Select Manual time configuration, which means de-select NTP Synchronization.
• Click the OK button.
• Perform a software reset for all modules that had a different configuration before; please refer
to section 5.2.5 Wall Control or 5.3.2 Module control.
• Open again the Setup time dialog.
Now you can perform the manual time configuration as explained above and the time of the HYDRA
modules gets set accordingly.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-17
 5. Menu and toolbar

Time Setup – Module

Selecting the Module mode enables to choose the time configuration for each module individually. This implies
that the modules are not synchronized with each other.
First select the HYDRA module you want to configure from the Module list. Then select the synchronization Mode.
The same modes Manual, NTP, NTP Date and LTC/VITC like for the wall configuration can be used. After that
choice enter the values in the same way as explained for the time setup of the wall above.

Figure 5-16
Setup time dialog – Module configuration

Other than in Wall mode in the Module mode, if the time configuration Manual is selected, then
with Get the time of the selected module not of the module connected to the operator PC is dis-
played.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-18
 5. Menu and toolbar

Timezone setup
On the Timezone setup tab the time zone for the whole wall or for an individual module can be set. Therefore
select either Wall to set one time zone for all HYDRA modules or select Module and chose the respective HYDRA
module from the list.
To specify your timezone, first the Timezone checkbox must be selected, then after clicking the ... button on the
right, the Select a timezone dialog appears. With a double click on a purple folder icon, it can be expanded to
show the appropriate time files. Select the required time file and click OK.

Figure 5-17
Setup time dialog – Timezone setup configuration (left) and Select a timezone dialog (right)

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-19
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.2.8 Setup timings

The Setup timing dialog allows to define timings or to change the settings of an existing timing. To use these
timings please refer to section 5.3.4 Setup module (Screen tab).
The timings list contains all stored timings. Click the Add button to add a new timing. In the Add timing dialog
enter the name of the new timing. If you want to use an existing timing as template, select Copy from existing
timing and choose the respective timing from the list. Click OK to confirm.
Select from the Timings list the timing that you want to adapt. The Split output setting is used to create a dual
timing, refer to section 8.4 Dual mode. When preparing a timing for a device that is not in the timings list the val-
ues supplied by the manufacturer must be entered into the upper part of the dialog. When all fields are adjusted
click the Calculate button, which uses the entered values to calculate all timings settings. They are displayed in
the lower part of the dialog. In general these values can be used without further adaptation. But in case that
some fine-tuning is required enable the Edit settings manually checkbox and adjust the required value manu-
ally.
When done, click OK to confirm your work.

Figure 5-18
Setup timings dialog

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-20
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.2.9 Setup hardware

The setup hardware dialog serves to re-assign the known configuration of boards and sources after adding or
removing boards from the HYDRA or after reordering them.
After each startup the HYDRA checks, if the detected hardware has still the same parameters like before halting it.
If it detects differences, it displays in the message bar the text “The hardware configuration has changed” to-
gether with the names of the concerned module to notify you from the changes.
On the setup hardware dialog first select one module from the Modules list on top. The left column lists now the
last saved state of the configuration of the boards of this module. The right column lists the currently detected
hardware configuration.
With the mouse you can drag an arrow from an entry of the left side to an entry on the right side. Therefore first
click on a box representing a board on the left side, then click in a box on the right side. Only boards of the same
type may be linked together in this way. While moving on boards on the right the arrow might have the follow-
ing colors:
• green: the board is of the same type and not yet linked to a saved board
• orange: the board is of the same type but already linked
• red: the board is of a different type and can not be linked
If you want to release a link, first click in the right box and then click in the free space in the middle between
both columns.
A link has the effect that all source settings of the selected board in the left column get assigned to the sources
of the selected board in the right column.
When ready click the OK button to confirm the new setup.

In addition this dialog can also be used to assign the configuration of one board to another.
By this the source properties of one board can be copied.

To make changes effective the command Reset Software is required for this HYDRA module; please
refer to section 5.3.2 Module control.

Figure 5-19
Setup hardware dialog

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-21
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.2.10 Setup audio...

With the Setup audio dialog the transition levels for the individual audio scales can be set. The transition level
defines the value at which the audio bar changes its color. Two transition levels exist per audio scale. To change
a level, just select a different number from the respective dBfs list.
With the Undo button the changes of the currently selected audio scale can be revoked. This can be done several
times for different audio scales. The default settings for an audio scale can be set in the same way with the
Default button. Pressing the Cancel button revokes all changes made; pressing the OK button accepts all
changes.

Figure 5-20
Audio setup dialog

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-22
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.2.11 Setup NGM-164…

The NGM-164 encodes for up to 64 audio sources audio meters and audio alarms into one compound audio
stream. If this stream is available on the network to that the HYDRA connects to, the HYDRA is able to decode the
stream and provide the contained audio sources for monitoring.
The Setup NGM-164 dialog provides access to the configuration of the NGM-164 and allows the configuration of
the scales of the audio sources.
A HYDRA is able to receive and process audio streams of multiple NGM-164 devices. For each stream the device
and the stream has to be specified. Therefore first enter a name for the NGM-164 into the Name field and click
Add. After that the configuration parameters can be added to the fields in the lower part of the dialog. To delete
an NGM-164 configuration, select the device from the list on the left and click Delete.
In the Audio Stream section the stream itself is configured. In the Destination box enter the multicast address
of the stream and in the Port box the port number for the stream.
In the NGM-164 section the network settings of the NGM-164 which are needed to connect to the device are
listed; in the Destination box enter the IP address of the NGM-164, and in the Port box enter the port number
for connecting.
If the Enable checkbox is selected this audio stream is decoded and its sources are considered in the general
sources list. As long as the checkbox is deselected the respective audio stream can be defined but it is not used
in the HYDRA.

Figure 5-21
Setup NGM-164 dialog

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-23
 5. Menu and toolbar

When clicking the Configure scales button the Configure scales dialog comes up. It serves to configure the used
scales for the sources of the selected NGM-164 device.
On the Configure scales dialog first click the Load configuration button. This starts a communication with the
selected NGM-164. Messages about the communication state are displayed in the list at the bottom of the dialog.
After a successful connection, the configuration of the audio sources is loaded and displayed in the configuration
list on the left. This list shows from left to right the channels in pairs with the used audio scale and the values for
the 0 dB Reference (offset) and the A/D Reference (A/D ref).
To adapt changes to the audio channel pair they first have to be selected. This can be done in different ways:
either select them by clicking the checkboxes in front of them or select all channels by clicking the select all
button. With the Unselect all button, all selections can be unmarked. With the Scale drop down list a scale type
can be chosen and pressing the Apply button writes this scale type in the configuration list to the selected chan-
nel pairs.
Until now the configuration is only visible in the GUI, clicking the Set scales button writes it to the NGM-164, the
new configuration is applied. Clicking the OK button also writes the configuration of the list to the NGM-164. The
Get scales button updates the configuration list on the left with the current configuration of the audio channels.
Offset and A/D ref are only listed for reference and can not be changed in this dialog, instead the Setup source
dialog must be used, please refer to section 5.3.7 Setup source.

Figure 5-22
Configure scales dialog

Even though the selection of the audio scales is also offered in the edit object dialog, for
audio sources of NGM-164 this has to be accomplished in the configure scales dialog of the
Setup NGM-164 dialog.
Scale settings from the edit object dialog are not effective for audio sources of NGM-164!

Communication with the NGM-164 is done by means of the NGM-164 network protocol. The
reference to this protocol can be found in the NGM-164 user’s manual, which is stored on the
CD-ROM iStudio Documentation & Supplement R5976593.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-24
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.3 Modules and sources

Properties of the projection modules and of encoders, streams and sources can be set by means of the com-
mands in the Layout toolbar and of the Module menu or the shortcut menu.

Figure 5-23
Layout toolbar, Module menu and shortcut menus

If multiple HYDRAS are used it must be distinguished between them. This is done by means of the tree, please
refer to section 6.2.1 Modules. Clicking on the respective HYDRA name in the tree switches to the respective HYDRA.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-25
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.3.1 Updating work- and display area

Auto update
If the command Auto update is selected the layout from the work area is updated to the projection modules
reiteratively. This comprises the arrangement of objects and the object definitions. The iSTUDIO software checks if
a conflict occurs (e.g. one source is used for two objects) and will display a warning in this case. Clicking OK will
display the invalid layout anyhow. Clicking Cancel will prevent from updating.

This command is also accessible via the button or by pressing the shortcut key Ctrl+A.
As long as this command is selected, the command Get layout has no use. If changes are done too fast after
each other the auto update is sometimes ignored. In this case the command Update layout can be used.

Update layout
The command Update layout transfers the layout from the work area to the projection modules and to the Dis-
play area. This comprises the arrangement of objects and the object definitions. The iSTUDIO Software checks if a
conflict occurs (e.g. one source is used for two objects) and will display a warning in this case. Clicking OK will
display the invalid layout anyhow. Clicking Cancel will prevent from updating. If the layout is already saved, then
in addition the name of the layout will be displayed on the Display area.

The command Update layout is also accessible via the button, the shortcut key Ctrl+U.

Get layout
The command Get layout transfers the layout from the selected module to the work area.

The command Get layout is also accessible via the button or the shortcut key Ctrl+G.

If you get a layout from the module to the work area while there are unsaved changes in the
layout on the work area, you are prompted to save changes in the layout on the work area.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-26
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.3.2 Module control

The following commands are applied to the selected HYDRA. Please refer to section 5.2.5 Wall Control for an instruc-
tion how all HYDRA devices of a wall can be controlled.

Halt module
With the Halt module command the selected HYDRAS can be halted. A warning dialog appears. After confirming
this dialog the shutdown screen is displayed while halting. When halted the display is just black and the HYDRA
can be switched off.

Reboot module
The Reboot module command halts the selected HYDRA and reboots it. This includes a reset of the software and
all hardware components. The warning dialog must be confirmed, before the HYDRA is rebooted.
The command must be applied after changes of Name or Wallname within the dialog 5.3.4 Setup module to make
them become effective. If changes have been made for multiple modules, it is sufficient to use once the com-
mand Reboot wall to reboot all HYDRA devices of the wall instead.

Be aware that the connection between the GUI and a Hydra module is interrupted while
rebooting. If you connected the GUI to the Hydra that is currently rebooted, you will have to
connect anew to the Hydra when the wall has rebooted!

Reset module
The Reset module command resets the software and all hardware components of the selected HYDRA except the
single board computer. The warning dialog must be confirmed, before the HYDRA is reset. If changes have been
made for multiple modules, it is sufficient to use once the command Reset wall to reset all HYDRA devices in-
stead.

Reset Software (Module)

The Reset Software (Wall) command resets the software of the selected HYDRA. During the software reset, the
module keeps on displaying its part on the display wall.
The command must be applied after changes to make them become effective. The following changes are con-
cerned:
• changed content of the folders logo and anim, please refer to section 8.1 Data structure and data access (reset
software is required to update the file lists, e.g. when selecting the logo of a logo object,
• for some NTP synchronization operations, please see section 5.2.7 Time setup.
If changes have been made for multiple modules, it is sufficient to use once the command Reset software
(Wall) for all HYDRA modules instead.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-27
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.3.3 Module status

The command Module status… displays a message window. You can select one of four kinds of status messages
from the message list: Note, Warning, Error or Alarm. The clear button clears the window such that only new
events will be displayed. With OK you close the window again. Each line displays a message starting with date
and time, when it occurred, continuing with the concerned source or hardware part and finally listing the event.

Figure 5-24
Module status dialog

Note Information about the current configuration as well as operational messages.

Warning Information about a non-standard configuration or a wrong hardware configuration of the HYDRA
(E.g. no output cards are present).
Error Information about internal failures of the HYDRA system software.
Alarm Information about failures of used components like fan/power failure or missing input sources.

An overview about possible event messages can be found in section 7.2 Device related errors.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-28
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.3.4 Setup module

The command Setup module… opens the Module properties dialog. By means of this dialog the properties of
the projection module and the HYDRA can be set. These are:
• General settings (name, geometry, region, etc. )
• Screen (selection of output signal)
• Network settings of the HYDRA
• Boards (list of all boards used in the HYDRA and additional, type dependent board configuration)
• Connected sources (configuration of the video and RGB sources)
• Startup options
• Alarm settings
• Settings for the use of the Andromeda protocol

Changing the name or wall name in the HYDRA properties, requires the command Reboot
module for the concerned HYDRA or Reboot wall, if name properties of multiple HYDRAS are
changed. Please refer also to section 5.3.2 Module control and 5.2.5 Wall Control respectively.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-29
 5. Menu and toolbar

General tab

Figure 5-25
Module properties dialog – General tab

On the General tab the settings of the projection module must be inserted. Insert a unique module name in the
Name field. The name of the wall must be typed into the Wallname field. Take care to insert for each HYDRA of
the wall the same wall name.
With the X and Y list the position of the projection module within that indicated wall must be specified. The X
coordinate counts from left to right. The Y coordinate counts from top to bottom, seen from in front of the Dis-
play Wall.
With the Region list some properties that depend on regional video standards can be enabled. These properties
are closed captions and XDS for the region US and WSS/VLI and AFD for the region UK. The regions Europe and
Japan have currently the same effect like the region US. The setting of these properties can be found on the VBI
and WSS tab in the Edit Object Dialog on the Properties tab for a video object, please refer to section 5.6.4 Edit
object… .
In the maximum log lines box the maximal number of lines in the log file can be determined. A useful amount
of lines ranges form 100 to 500 lines. Not more than 2000 lines should be used.
The logged information can be displayed by the Module status dialog box, see above.
By means of the Cache checkbox the cache used for the active layout can be controlled. If it is not selected, the
cache will not be used. This leads to a faster update speed, which is above all helpful with larger walls of multi-
ple display modules.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-30
 5. Menu and toolbar

Screen tab
On the Screen tab the format for internal data processing is set. These are usually also the output settings. Any-
how, depending on the output card, also differing output resolution and timing can be set. This is done on the
Boards tab, please see below.

Figure 5-26
Module properties dialog – Screen tab

The Resolution list provides a collection of settings, either named after the device, or after resolution and timing
itself. Individual timings can be edited by means of the 5.2.8 Setup timings dialog. Dual settings are used, if two
projection modules are connected to one HYDRA in dual mode, see section 8.4 Dual mode. For dual mode for dis-
play devices with pixel clock higher than 68MHz the appropriate internal timings must be used.
Timings for SXGA+ and UXGA resolutions which do not have the word native in their name perform pixel dou-
bling. Pixel doubling is explained in section 8.4 Dual mode. Timings with the word native in their name process
the complete amount of pixel throughout the whole image generating process.
The settings PAL SDI, PAL SDI Dual, NTSC SDI, PAL CVBS, PAL CVBS Dual, NTSC CVBS and NTSC CVBS Dual are espe-
cially useful with the DVI video output card; please refer to Boards tab below.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-31
 5. Menu and toolbar

Please refer to the following table for the complete list of available settings:

setting projection module/device/application

Barco devices
Projector Barco Lucy OVERVIEW-MP50, OverView cPG (XGA)
Projector Barco Lucy Dual OVERVIEW-MP50, OverView cPG (XGA), dual mode
Projector Barco mL OVERVIEW-ML (XGA)
Projector Barco mL Dual OVERVIEW-ML (XGA), dual mode
Projector Barco MaryLou OVERVIEW cPR, S70 (SXGA)
Projector Barco OverView DG XGA OVERVIEW DG (XGA) no genlock on PAL
Projector Barco OverView DG XGA Dual OVERVIEW DG (XGA) no genlock on PAL, dual mode
Projector Barco OverView DG XGA PAL OVERVIEW DG (XGA) enabling genlock on PAL
Projector Barco OverView DG XGA PAL Dual OVERVIEW DG (XGA) enabling genlock on PAL, dual mode
Projector Barco OverView DR SXGA OVERVIEW DR (SXGA) no genlock on PAL
Projector Barco OverView DR SXGA PAL OVERVIEW DR (SXGA) enabling genlock on PAL
Projector Barco OverView DR+ SXGA+ OVERVIEW DR+ (SXGA+) usage of pixel doubling
Projector Barco OverView DR+ SXGA+ Native OVERVIEW DR+ (SXGA+) native resolution,
only with single board computer/2
Projector Barco OverView DR+ SXGA+ Native OVERVIEW DR+ (SXGA+) native resolution @50Hz enabling genlock
50Hz on PAL, only with single board computer/2
Projector Barco OverView PU UXGA OVERVIEW PU (UXGA) usage of pixel doubling
Projector Barco OverView PU UXGA Native OVERVIEW PU (UXGA) native resolution,
only with single board computer/2
LCD Barco Solaris LC40 SOLARIS LC40
LCD Barco Solaris LC40 Portrait SOLARIS LC40 (with rotation module)
LCD Barco Solaris LC40 second edition SOLARIS LC40, second edition
LCD Barco LC-42/47 50Hz LC series 50 Hz timing
LCD Barco LC-42/47 60Hz LC series 60 Hz timing
3rd party devices
LCD NEC LCD3000 LCD NEC LCD3000
LCD NEC LCD4000 50Hz LCD NEC LCD4000 50 Hz; only functional with a firmware change
of the display from NEC-Mitsubishi.
Plasma Panasonic TH42PWD3 Plasma Panasonic TH42PWD3
Plasma Panasonic TH42PWD3 Dual Plasma Panasonic TH42PWD3 Dual, dual mode
Plasma Panasonic TH-50PHD3 Plasma Panasonic TH50PHD3
Plasma Panasonic TH-50PHD3 Dual Plasma Panasonic TH50PHD3, dual mode
Plasma Pioneer Plasma Pioneer
Plasma Pioneer PDP503 MXE Plasma Pioneer PDP503 MXE
Plasma Fujitsu P50XHA10E Plasma Fujitsu P50XHA10E
Plasma NEC PX-50XM1A Plasma NEC PX-50XM1A
Plasma NEC PX-50XM3G Plasma NEC PX-50XM3G
Plasma Selti MPD5010A-01 Plasma Selti MPD5010A-01
Plasma Zenith P50W26B Portrait Plasma Zenith P50W26B, only applicable with the one channel
output card

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-32
 5. Menu and toolbar

VESA timings
VESA XGA 60Hz
VESA XGA 60Hz Dual OVERVIEW PU (UXGA), dual mode
OVERVIEW PU (UXGA) native, dual mode
OVERVIEW DR+ (SXGA+), dual mode,
only for digital output of DVI-DVI digital/analog output card
OVERVIEW DR+ (SXGA+) native, dual mode,
only for digital output of DVI-DVI digital/analog output card
VESA XGA 60 Hz, dual mode
VESA UXGA 60 HZ, dual mode,
only for digital output of DVI-DVI digital/analog output card
VESA SXGA 60Hz
VESA UXGA 60Hz only applicable with DVI-DVI digital/analog output card at the
digital output
Video output
PAL SDI
PAL SDI Dual
NTSC SDI
NTSC SDI Dual not supported
PAL CVBS
PAL CVBS Dual
NTSC CVBS
internal timings only applicable with DVI-DVI digital/analog output card
Hydra Internal 15:9 60Hz not applicable
Hydra Internal 15:9 60Hz Dual SOLARIS LC40, dual mode
LCD NEC LCD3000, dual mode
Plasma Pioneer, dual mode
Plasma Selti, dual mode
Plasma Pioneer PDP503MXE, dual mode
Plasma Fujitsu P50XHA10E, dual mode
Hydra Internal 9:15 60Hz not applicable
Hydra Internal 9:15 60Hz Dual SOLARIS LC40 Portrait, dual mode
Hydra Internal 5:4 60Hz not applicable
Hydra Internal 5:4 60Hz Dual OVERVIEW CPR, S70 (SXGA), dual mode
OVERVIEW DR (SXGA) no genlock on PAL, dual mode
OVERVIEW DR (SXGA) enabling genlock on PAL, dual mode
VESA SXGA 60Hz
Hydra Internal 16:9 60Hz not applicable
Hydra Internal 16:9 60Hz Dual Plasma Panasonic TH50PHD3, dual mode
Plasma NEC PC-50XM1A, dual mode
LCD Barco Solaris LC40 second edition Dual SOLARIS LC40 second edition, dual mode
Table 5-4
Resolution settings of projection modules

If the output resolution of the HYDRA gets changed from XGA to SXGA or vice versa, please refer
also to section BIOS setup in the HYDRA user’s manual.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-33
 5. Menu and toolbar

If the physical aspect ratio of the display differs from the aspect ratio that is displayed on it this can be commit-
ted with the aspect ratio list. The following settings can be chosen:

setting meaning
none default setting
displayed aspect ratio is the same as physical aspect ratio
4/3 displayed aspect ratio is 4/3
5/4 displayed aspect ratio is 5/4
16/9 displayed aspect ratio is 16/9
9/16 displayed aspect ratio is 9/16
Table 5-5
Settings for the aspect ratio list

The Genlock on first source checkbox enables the use of the genlock feature. This locks the refresh rate of the
projection module to the refresh rate of the signal of the first video source and thus guarantees a synchronized
update, which is especially helpful when displaying videos with slow movement. Not all HYDRA hardware sup-
ports this feature.
The following timings support Genlock optimally:

timing condition
Projector Barco MaryLou if a PAL source is locked, NTSC sources might not be displayed properly if
scaled too much.
Note that the settings of the projection module needs to be adapted as well
(switch async option to sync), please see the respective user’s manual of the
projection module.
Projector Barco Lucy if a PAL source is locked, NTSC sources might not be displayed properly if
Projector Barco Lucy Dual scaled too much.
Table 5-6
Genlock

Genlock can only be used, if the overlay input is not used!

Genlock does not work correctly for the following progressive formats of HD-SDI:
1080/30P, 1080/29.97P, 1080/24P, 1080/25P, 1080/23.98 !

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-34
 5. Menu and toolbar

Network tab
On the Network tab the Hostname, the IP address and the Netmask must be inserted. The indication of the
Gateway is optional.
To send SNMP traps the IP address of a connected service must be specified in the SNMP box. To add an SNMP
recipient press the Add button to open the Add SNMP Manager dialog. In this dialog enter the IP address, of the
SNMP manager, where the SNMP traps should be sent to and click OK. SNMP traps can also be sent to multiple
recipients, if you enter more than one address. In addition the SNMP version v1 or v2c must be specified.
Please see also section 5.3.7 Setup source (Alarm tab) and the description for the Alarms tab below for an instruc-
tion how an SNMP trap is activated for an individual alarm.

Figure 5-27
Module properties dialog – Network tab (left) and Add SNMP manager (right)

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-35
 5. Menu and toolbar

Boards tab
On the Boards tab all slots of the HYDRA are listed including the inserted boards and their version. The number in
square brackets indicates the slot, followed by the type of board, while v0, v1, ... stands for version 0, version 1
and so on. If Streaming video boards or output boards are selected, additional configuration options appear on
the right part of the dialog:

Streaming video card

If your system is equipped with Streaming video cards, you should configure the IP address, Netmask and
Gateway of the Streaming video card. As well select the appropriate compression algorithm. A list with the pos-
sible compression algorithms for various encoders can be found in section 5.3.5 Setup encoders.

NG Streaming Video Card

NG Streaming video cards are listed with the name 4-J2KDecoder vx .
The most top Network section can be used to configure a port for service interaction of the board. The related
connectors on the board are the two lower ones. The can be used for a redundant connection. Configuration of
this port is not required for standard operation.
The necessary settings are IP address and Netmask in the Network(Gb) section and Gateway in the General
section. They are used to configure the two upper connectors of the board, which establish a redundant connec-
tion to the video network.

Figure 5-28
Module properties dialog – Boards tab –Streaming video card (left) and NG Streaming video card (right)

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-36
 5. Menu and toolbar

Output boards
In the Resolution list is by default the same setting indicated as in the Resolution list on the Screen tab. For
DVI-DVI digital/analog output cards (output v8, output v9), DVI-DVI digital output cards with scaling (output v12)
and DVI video output cards (output v4) the output resolution can be changed.

Dual resolutions are not available in the resolution list. Settings on the Boards tab refer to
individual outputs.

Figure 5-29
Module properties dialog – Boards tab – DVI-DVI output card with scaling (left) and DVI video output card (right)

The DVI-DVI digital/analog output cards and the DVI-DVI digital output cards provide both additional scaling ca-
pabilities for the output. It might be useful to change the output settings, if multiple output cards are used and if
they connect to different display devices, with different resolutions and timings. One output card could then
display the data without re-scaling it, because the settings chosen on the Screen tab provide already the desired
output settings. This means if selecting this card on the Boards tab, the resolution of this card must not be
changed. For the other card, the data needs to be re-scaled, therefore after selecting that card, the appropriate
settings for the connected output device must be chosen from the Resolution list.
On the DVI video output card there are two types of output connectors (DVI and BNC), which are usually con-
nected to devices with different requirements on the data. Therefore for both outputs the resolution has to be
specified.
• If on the Screen Tab a setting suitable for output at the DVI connector has been selected for internal data
processing, then this setting is used for the output on the DVI connector and the Resolution list is not appli-
cable. For the BNC connection the appropriate setting can be selected from the Video list. This is a configura-
tion that is optimized for output at the DVI connector, as the data at the BNC connector has to be re-scaled
before being displayed. The SDI resync checkbox is selected and disabled in this case. This means that at the
DVI output genlock is supported (if Genlock on first source was selected on the Screen tab) but not at the
BNC output.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-37
 5. Menu and toolbar

• If on the Screen tab a setting suitable for output at the BNC connector is selected, then this resolution is
used for output at the BNC connector. On the Boards tab the setting for the DVI output is pre-selected in the
Resolution list and cannot be changed. The SDI resync checkbox must be enabled. In addition the Genlock
on first source checkbox on the Screen tab may not be selected.
The table below gives an overview about the possible configurations:

Screen tab Genlock on SDI resync Boards tab

Resolution first source Resolution / Video
For DVI output Video selectable:
disabled or enabled
settings for the BNC connector can be selected from the list
enabled
For BNC output Resolution not selectable:
disabled enabled
The settings for the BNC connector are also applied for the DVI
connector
On both outputs genlocking not possible.
Table 5-7
Dependencies of output settings, Genlock and SDI resync

Sources tab
On the Sources tab all sources which are connected to the HYDRA can be managed. They are listed in the Sources
table. The first column, marked with the number sign # indicates the physical input on the HYDRA, the second
column, marked with a question mark indicates the source type. M stands for streaming video, S stands for SDI
video, H is HD-SDI video, A is analog video and R is RGB data. To each source a non-default name can be as-
signed. Just place the cursor in the respective field in the Name column and type the name.
With the Properties button the source properties dialog of the selected source appears and changes of these
properties can be made. This dialog is explained in the section 5.3.7 Setup source below.
With the Audio sources box the number of audio sources that are listed in the sources entry of the tree can be
selected. By default no audio sources are listed.
The Audio Cabling entries provide two ways of cabling:
• Alternately (default): The audio standard cabling for the HYDRA is alternately. The left and right channel of a
source is inserted consecutively to the HYDRA audio channels. The table below demonstrates this cabling:

channel source channel source

0 1 left 1 1 right
2 2 left 3 2 right
4 3 left 5 3 right
... ... ... ...
54 28 left 55 28 right
Table 5-8
Alternately cabling

• Sequential: Sequential audio cabling inserts on the first part of the audio channels of HYDRA the left channels
of the sources and on the second part of the audio channels of a HYDRA audio connector the right channels of
the sources.

channel source channel source

0 1 left 28 1 right
1 2 left 29 2 right
2 3 left 30 3 right
... ... ... ...
27 28 left 55 28 right
Table 5-9
Sequential cabling

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-38
 5. Menu and toolbar

With sequential audio cabling it is not guaranteed that the Hydra detects audio phase errors
correctly!

Figure 5-30
Module properties dialog – Sources tab

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-39
 5. Menu and toolbar

Startup tab
On the Startup tab, the layout of the module during HYDRA startup can be chosen. As default a black screen with
the IP address of the HYDRA and the version of iSTUDIO will be displayed. Alternatively to that, the layout that was
displayed at the shutdown can be displayed or a layout from the layouts list can be chosen.

Alarm tab
In order to notify of a general HYDRA alarm one tally of a video source can be selected. Therefore the Enable tally
on alarm checkbox must be selected and a video source must be chosen from the source list. With the second
list one of the tallies of the source can be specified. By this it is for example possible to control an external
buzzer that is connected to the hardware output of the specified source, if an alarm occurs.

Only tallies that are configured as hardware output tallies or as software tallies can be used and
are itemized; please refer also to section 5.3.7 Setup source (Tally tab).

One tally may at one time only be used for one alarm method:
• Enable tally on alarm is selected on the Alarm tab of the Module properties dialog (Setting
of this tab),
• tally is enabled on the Alarm tab of the Source properties dialog, please refer to section 5.3.7
Setup source,
• Set Tally on alarm on the Tally tab of the Source properties dialog.
If one tally is already enabled in one of the other mentioned dialogs, it will not be available in the
tally list of this dialog.

When selecting a tally of a Quad SDI video input card or a Quad analog video card there are also
three tallies offered even though there are only two tallies available per source. Therefore tally
three may not be selected! For a source of the Streaming video card, no tally may be selected!

On the NTP Alarm tab an alarm can be activated in case of the loss of NTP synchronization, please refer also to
section 7.1.2 Synchronization errors. To configure an NTP alarm is only expedient, if the time setup of the respective
HYDRA module is configured for NTP (not NTP Date) or for LTC/VITC synchronization (LTC/VITC only in wall mode),
otherwise the alarm will always be active, please refer to section 5.2.7 Time setup.
To enable an alarm click the Enabled checkbox. With the Delay (seconds) box the seconds are indicated be-
tween the alarm is detected and it is displayed. With the Clear checkbox it can be selected whether alarms are
automatically cleared within a Delay of seconds or not.
With the four checkboxes Logging, Show in alarm list, Ring buzzer, Send SNMP it can be selected on which
interfaces an alarm shall be reported.
If Ring buzzer is enabled, on the wall alarms area the buzzer toggle button must also be activated to be able to
ring the buzzer, please see section 5.2.2 Wall alarms area.
If an SNMP trap shall be sent, in the setup module dialog, SNMP must be configured, please see section 5.3.4
Setup module (Network tab). The Use interval checkbox enables to report errors within user defined time intervals.
These intervals can be created and edited with the Define intervals dialog. You find a description of this dialog
in section 5.3.7 Setup source (Alarms tab).

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-40
 5. Menu and toolbar

Figure 5-31
Module properties dialog – Startup tab (left) and Alarm tab (right)

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-41
 5. Menu and toolbar

Protocols tab
On the Protocols tab the settings for the logical signal processing system Andromeda can be set.
Andromeda is a protocol used to control the contents of UMDs (source name) and tallies. It is based on RS-232
serial communication. Therefore the serial port [1] on the single board computer on the HYDRA must be used and
for Device on the Andromeda tab the entry ttyS0 must be selected. With the Baudrate list select the relevant
value of the signal. The Swap tallies checkbox enables to rotate the tallies. With the Enabled checkbox the usage
of the Andromeda system can be enabled.

Figure 5-32
Module properties dialog – Protocols tab

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-42
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.3.5 Setup encoders

With the command Setup encoders... the Setup encoders dialog is opened to configure the settings for each
type of encoder, that provides a video stream, monitored by the HYDRA module.
To define a new encoder type, enter its name into the Name field and click Add. The new encoder is displayed
in the Encoders list and has default settings. To delete an already defined encoder select it with the mouse from
the Encoders list and click Delete.
When editing the properties of an encoder, make sure that it is selected in the Encoders list. Especially when
creating a new encoder, at first its name must be added, before its properties can be changed.
From the IP protocol list one of the three options UDP, RTP or TCP can be chosen.

Please note, that RTP can only be used with Streaming video boards with firmware version 2.0
and higher.

With the fields Skip at start, Skip at end the amount of bytes to be skipped at the start respectively the end of
an incoming IP-packet is determined. With the Stream type list select the type of the stream. The following
types can be selected:

Auto automatic detection of the incoming stream (This method requires some extra time for the
initial analysis of the stream)
Elementary MPEG elementary stream
Program MPEG program stream
Transport MPEG transport stream

Into the TCP field a TCP string can be entered for configuration of the encoder. It is used, if the TCP checkbox is
selected.
All changes done in the Setup encoders dialog are only adapted, when the OK button is pressed. With the
Cancel button all changes also the added and deleted encoders are rejected.

Figure 5-33
Setup encoders dialog

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-43
 5. Menu and toolbar

The following table lists the encoder specific values. They are valid with STREAMING VIDEO CARD with firmware 6.0.
The values for TCP and Video PID must be entered not into the Setup encoders dialog but into the Setup
Streams dialog, please refer to the next section. The compression algorithm must be entered in the Setup
module dialog on the boards tab; please refer to section 5.3.4 Setup module.

Encoder compression IP Skip at Skip at Stream TCP Video

manufacturer – type algorithm protocol start end type PID

AXIS – mjpeg TCP 0 0 auto ON 0

Use port 80 for TCP and indicate the encoder IP address; signaling method is
http; signaling is supported.
206 Startstring example: Axis241Q://GET /axis-cgi/mjpg/
ª video.cgi HTTP/1.0\n\n
206M Startstring example: Axis241Q://GET /axis-cgi/mjpg/
ª video.cgi HTTP/1.0\n\n
Resolutions with 1280 horizontal pixels are not supported.
207 / 207W / 210 / Startstring example: Axis241Q://GET /axis-cgi/mjpg/
210A / 211 / 211A / ª video.cgi HTTP/1.0\n\n
213 PTZ / 214 PTZ /
216FD / 225FD / 231D /
231D+ / 232D / 232D+ /
241S / 241SA / 242S IV
221 Startstring example: Axis241Q://GET /axis-cgi/mjpg/
ª video.cgi HTTP/1.0\n\n
Up to 30 frames/sec
240Q Startstring example: Axis241Q://GET /axis-cgi/mjpg/
ª video.cgi?camera=1 HTTP/1.0\n\n
241Q / 241QA Startstring example: Axis241Q://GET /axis-cgi/mjpg/
ª video.cgi?camera=1 HTTP/1.0\n\n
A maximum use of 4 4CIF streams with a maximum quality of 75% (or at
least 25% compression) is recommended.
Barco – TransForm SCN scn UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0
BOSCH – NWC-0455 Dinion / h263 RTP 0 0 auto ON 0
NWC-0455 DinionXF / No on-board RCP+ support; I-frame distance may not be 0.
VideoJet8008 / VIP X1 /
Startstring example: VIP X
VIP X1600 / VIP X2
BOSCH – Videojet 10 / Video- h263 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0
jet 1000 / Videojet Xpro / No on-board RCP+ support; I-frame distance may not be 0.
VIP 10 / VIP 1000
BOSCH – Videojet 1000 / Video- mpeg2 RTP 4 0 auto OFF 0
jet 8000 / Videojet Xpro / No on-board RCP+ support.
VIP 1000
Cieffe – NETTUNO mpeg4 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0
Coretec – VCX-2400-E mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0
Cornet – mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0
iVDO Streamer 2/4 Encoder
Cornet – mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0
iVDO Streamer 2/4 Encoder
DVTeL – 7601e mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto ON 0
Use port 3000 for TCP,
Startstring example: SmartSight

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-44
 5. Menu and toolbar

Encoder compression IP Skip at Skip at Stream TCP Video

manufacturer – type algorithm protocol start end type PID

Exterity – A/V server mpeg2 RTP/UDP 0 /4 0 auto OFF 0

IP protocol: for Transport/UDP = UDP
for Transport/RTP and Elementary = RTP
SkipAtStart: for Elementary = 4, else = 0
GE Security (Visiowave) – 2D wavelet UDP 0 0 auto ON 0
Discovery 2400 / Use the encoder TCP port for TCP,
Discovery 300 (Visiobox) /
Evolution HD Startstring example: Visiobox
Signaling method is TCP, signaling is supported.
HaiVision – Hai210 mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0
Hi Tron – e-Videoserver mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0
No usage of Advanced simple profile.
Encoder must be set to “Send to (Client) IP”
iMPath – i1000 mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0
iMPath – i4000 mpeg2 RTP/UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0
RTP or UDP has to be configured in accordance with the encoder configuration.
TM
IndigoVision – VideoBridge mpeg4 TCP 0 0 element. ON 0
8000 881 / 8000 882 Use port 49500 for TCP; for each encoder the streaming port must be differ-
ent. TCP is enabled without sending a string.
The Barco Indigovision interface tool is required for the streaming!
IndigoVision – mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0
VideoBridgeTM 8000 882 The Barco Indigovision interface tool is required for the streaming!
JVC – VN-C655U mjpeg UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0
Software viewer is needed to start the multicast stream and for keep-alive.
LANACCESS – onSafe MPEG2 mpeg2 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0
LANACCESS – onSafe MPEG4 mpeg4 - - - - OFF -
Lenel – Network vido recorder mjpeg UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0
TCP is not enabled for the Streaming video card.
Mavix – MediaRacer 100 / mpeg2 UDP 12 0 auto ON 0
MediaRacer 150 Multiple ports for TCP possible,
Startstring: Mavix
Mavix – MediaRacer 100 / mpeg4 UDP 12 0 auto ON 0
MediaRacer 150 Multiple ports for TCP possible,
Startstring: Mavix
Mobotix – D10Di-FixDome / M22 mxpeg UDP 0 0 auto ON 0
Startstring: Mobotix://GET /control/faststream.jpg?
ª stream=MxPEG&fps=25.000 HTTP/1.0\n\n
Signaling method is HTTP, signaling is supported.
The stream is a unicast stream. Resolutions up to 1280×576 supported.
NiceVision (Fast Video Security) – mpeg2 RTP 4 0 auto OFF 0
ENC 8M2

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-45
 5. Menu and toolbar

Encoder compression IP Skip at Skip at Stream TCP Video

manufacturer – type algorithm protocol start end type PID

NiceVision – Recorder Pro mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0

Only CIF resolution, only I and P frames are used.
No successive Video Object Plane (VOP) start markers without data (used in
recorded streams);
Stream must be multicasted and always available on the network (no
stream setup signaling required).
Optelecom-NKF – mpeg2 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0
c15 / c20 / CS20 The Ethernet interfaces must be set to Forced 100 Mbps Full Duplex, when con-
necting to an NKF Switch.
Optibase – MGW3100 mpeg2 – – – auto OFF –
Path 1 – Cx 1800 mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0
Pelco – PelcoNet NET350 h263 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0
I-frame distance may not be 0.
Pelco – PelcoNet NET4001A mpeg2 RTP 4 0 auto OFF 0
No on-board RCP+ support.
Pelco – PelcoNet NET4001A h263 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0
No on-board RCP+ support; limited frame rate.
Siemens OTN – MVIDIP mpeg2 – – – – OFF –
Siemens OTN – MVIDIP mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0
Tandberg – E5710 mpeg2 – – – – OFF –
Tandberg – Mediaplex-20 mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0
Tandberg – TT6120 mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0, 1, ...
Generates multiple-program transport streams (MPTS). The Video PID is
used to select the program.
Tandberg – TT7116 mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 590
Teleste – EASI BLUEbox / mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0
EASI IPET1 / EASI IPET3 /
EASI MoRIS
Teleste – EASI MoRIS / mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0
EASI MPC-E1 / EASI MPC-
E2 / EASI MPC-E4 /
EASI MPX-E8
Telindus – Cellstack Centauri mpeg2 RTP 0 0 auto OFF 0
VBrick – VB4000 / VB6000 mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0
ISMA features not supported.
VBrick – VBXcast 9140-4200 / mpeg4 UDP 12 0 auto OFF 0
VBXcast 9140-4300 ISMA features not supported.
Verint – S1500e / S1600e-T mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto ON 0
Startstring example: SmartSight
Only with encoder firmware 3.20 build 444. Usage of S1700e recommend.
Verint – S1700e mpeg4 RTP 0 0 auto ON 0
startstring example: SmartSight

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-46
 5. Menu and toolbar

Encoder compression IP Skip at Skip at Stream TCP Video

manufacturer – type algorithm protocol start end type PID

VideoLAN – VideoLAN (VLC/VLS) mpeg2 see 0 0 auto OFF 0

mpeg4 below:
mjpeg
For IP protocol multicast, unicast, UDP or RTP is possible.
Vorx – VON v1.0 mpeg2 UDP 0 0 auto OFF 0
mpeg4
Decoding of AES streams is not supported.
Table 5-10
Encoder dependant parameter values

For some encoders the settings are not defined, if there are difficulties to set them, please
contact the Barco support, see section 10.1 Hotline.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-47
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.3.6 Setup streams

With the command Setup streams... the Setup streams dialog is opened. It serves to configure the settings
needed to connect to the video streams monitored by the HYDRA.
Like on the Setup encoders dialog with the Name field and the Add and Delete button, streams can be added
and removed, please see the section above. To edit the settings of a stream, the stream must be selected in the
Streams list; a purple bar then marks it.
The entries under Encoder define the connecting settings for communication from the HYDRA to the encoder. The
Encoder list contains all defined encoder types. If the suitable type is not yet in the list it must be defined with
the Setup encoders dialog first. If in the Setup Encoder dialog TCP was enabled then the IP address of the en-
coder must be inserted into the IP address field and the respective port number on that the encoder listens to
messages from the HYDRA must be inserted into the Port field.
The Video PID should be entered for transport streams and if the PAT (program allocation tables) or the PMT
(program map tables) is not sent with the stream. 0 is a predefined value. It causes an auto-search for the video
PID. No video will be shown, if no valid PID is found.
The section Destination describes the settings the encoder uses to distribute the stream. The HYDRA needs these
settings to receive the stream. It can be selected between the packet types Unicast, Broadcast and Multicast.
If Unicast is selected, only the Port of the Streaming video card must be indicated. The encoder sends the
stream just to one single unicast IP address, which is in this case the IP address of the Streaming video card,
please refer to section 5.3.4 Setup module (Boards). With Multicast you have to indicate the multicast address of
the stream into the IP address field (ranges within 224.x.x.x to 239.x.x.x) as well as the Port where the stream
is sent to. For a Broadcast stream, you only have to indicate the respective Port.
All changes done in the Setup streams dialog are only adapted, when the OK button is pressed. With the Cancel
button all changes also the added and deleted encoders are rejected.

Figure 5-34
Setup stream dialog

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-48
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.3.7 Setup source

One possibility to open the Source properties dialog is to use the command Setup source… of the Module
menu or the shortcut menu, if a video object on the work area is selected. The displaying properties and other
related properties of the source of this object can be changed.
The other possibility is to open the Module properties dialog, select the respective source on the source tab and
press the properties button to edit the properties, please refer to section 5.3.4 Setup module (Sources) above.
The title bar of the Source properties dialog indicates the type of the input board that is used to insert the
source and the name of the source. The dialog contains six tabs: The Video/RGB, Audio, Alarm, Tally, VBI and
Copy tab. On the five first tabs the properties can be determined. On the Copy tab a selection of properties of
the edited source can be copied to the sources selected in the sources list.
At the bottom of the dialog there is an OK button. Clicking this button confirms the chosen settings and closes
the dialog. Clicking the Update button applies the changes to the selected source but keeps the dialog open for
further changes.

Updating causes the Cancel button to become red. This signals that canceling can not reverse the
changes. The Cancel button anyhow closes the dialog.

Video/RGB tab
Depending on the connected source either a Video tab or an RGB tab is displayed. On this tab the display charac-
teristics can be set. When releasing a slider after moving it, the new setting will directly be adapted. If the source
is displayed on the projection module changes can directly be viewed. Numeral values can also be inserted in
the text boxes. In general, values become just permanently set when the OK or Update button is pressed. Click-
ing the Default button restores the iSTUDIO default settings for a video or RGB source.

Figure 5-35
Source properties dialog – Video tab – Examples of quad analog video source (left) and RGB source (right)

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-49
 5. Menu and toolbar

Setting Applies to Meaning

Video cards:
Automatic Chrominance Quad analog video card Automatic gain control for chrominance values of
Gain Control the video signal switched on or off
Crop settings all cards Opens the Crop settings dialog, to adjust the
visible part of the video; see below.
Default all cards Resets the sliders to the default values
Type all cards except Streaming Video Card indicates the type of the source
Type selection all cards except Streaming Video Card, From a list a dedicated type can be set.
HD-SDI input card HD-SDI input card performs always autodetection.
SVHS Dual analog input card Choice between VHS and SVHS
Stream Streaming video card Selection of the active stream
RGB input card :
Sync State specifies the format of the RGB signal
Default default resolution for the signal

The selection of the video stream for a Streaming Video Card will be overruled when assigning an-
other stream to this source with the Edit object dialog of a video object, please refer to section 5.6.4
Edit object… .

The table below lists all available display settings for digital and analog video and RGB sources:

Source type Video source parameters Value range

S – Video Tab Black 0-255
SDI video via Brightness 0-255
Dual SDI input card Contrast 0-1023
SatSinHUE 0-2047
SatCosHUE 0-2047
S – Video Tab Brightness 0-255
SDI video via Contrast 0-255
Quad SDI input card Sat 0-255
HUE 0-360
H – Video Tab Brightness 0-255
HD-SDI video via Contrast 0-255
HD-SDI video card Sat 0-255
HUE 0-360
A – Video Tab Brightness 0-255
analog video via Contrast 0-255
Dual analog video card SatU 0-255
SatV 0-255
HUE 0-255
A – Video Tab Brightness 0-255
analog video via Contrast 0-127
Quad analog video card Sat 0-127
HUE 0-255

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-50
 5. Menu and toolbar

M – Video Tab Brightness 0-255

streaming video via Contrast 0-255
Streaming video board Sat 0-255
HUE 0-360
R – RGB Tab HStart 0-2047
RGB input card HActiveWidth 0-2047
VStart 0-2047
VActiveWidth 0-2047
HTotal 0-4095
Phase 0-31
Clamp position 0-255
Clamp width 0-255
Red gain 0-255
Red offset 0-127
Green gain 0-255
Green offset 0-127
Blue gain 0-255
Blue offset 0-127
Table 5-11
Settings of video and RGB sources

On the Crop settings dialog the visible area of the video can be set. There are three possibilities to edit the
cropped view, with the mouse, with the sliders or with the numerical values in the text field.
To edit the measures of the cropped view with the mouse, move the mouse into the upper part of the dialog,
which contains the visual presentation of the cropped view. When moving the mouse over the border of the
cropped view, the mouse becomes a resize tool and you can drag the borders by keeping the left mouse button
pressed. If the mouse is inside the cropped view it becomes a move tool and you can move the section within
the normal view.
The sliders and text fields can also be used. The position of the X and Y Offset sliders define the distance of the
visible video image towards the left and top position of the available video image in percent. The Width and
Height sliders consider the remaining space between current X Offset position and right border, respectively Y
Offset position and lower border as their available range. The numerical values in the boxes at the right side
consider always the whole width or height of the normal view as 100%.

Figure 5-36
Crop settings dialog

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-51
 5. Menu and toolbar

Audio tab
The Audio tab serves to select the audio sources, which can be displayed with up to 16 audio bars located on the
left and right or the top side of an object. First the Audio mode has to be selected to define the type of the dis-
played audio sources, please see the table below.

Audio mode Meaning Available sources

Embedded Embedded audio sources available 16 audio sources per source. Numbering refers to the four
via SDI and HD-SDI sources group channels. Thereby e.g. 4-1 stands for channel one of
group four.
External External audio sources inserted via Up to 112 sources are available.
analog or digital audio input boards Numbering from 0, 1, … , 111
NGM-164 External audio sources, streamed Up to 64 sources are available per audio stream.
by the selected NGM-164 Numbering from 0, 1, … , 63

The numbers from 00 to 15 on top of the dialog symbolizes the alignment of the audio bars in the video. Audio
bar 00 to 07 is displayed on the left side, where 00 is at the left border and 07 the most centered on the left
side. Similarly 08 is the most centered on the right side and 15 the audio bar on the very right.

Each audio bar needs a distinct width. If the object is too small to show all audio bars next
to each other, the audio bars in the middle will not be displayed!

To each channel an audio source can be assigned by means of the list with the available audio sources next to
that channel. Formatting and number of available sources, which are offered in the list depends on the audio
mode. An explanation is also in the table above.

Figure 5-37
Source properties dialog – Audio tab

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-52
 5. Menu and toolbar

Furthermore two Phase bars, each showing the phase between two adjacent audio channels, can be displayed.
Therefore the respective phase bar checkbox must be selected and the two audio channels must be chosen from
the list. The phase bars are then displayed on top of the respective object. The phase bar is displayed as a gray
bar with a scale from -1 to +1. Positive values are displayed as a green block ranging from 0 to the value. Nega-
tive values are displayed as violet block ranging from 0 to the value. Values in the range of +1 indicate that both
sources are in phase and of acceptable level. Values in the range of -1 indicate that the signals are out of phase
but of acceptable level. Values in the range of 0 indicate either that there are completely different signals or that
both signals are not of acceptable level or that the signals have a phase difference of about 90°.
The audio reference level can be adapted to the level of the input signal by means of the two audio reference
sliders on the bottom of the dialog. Depending on the audio type and scale type the setting of the one or the
other or both sliders have to be used. Please see the table below:

Signal A/D Reference 0 dBu Reference

digital audio on digital scale no effect no effect
digital audio on analog scale shift the reference level no effect
analog audio on digital scale no effect shift the reference level
analog audio on analog scale shift the reference level shift the reference level

The range for A/D Reference and 0 dBu Reference depend on the type of the selected audio sources:

type of audio source A/D Reference 0 dBu Reference

embedded / external -1 .. -24 dBfs -20 .. +20 dB
NGM-164 -10 .. -30 dBfs -12 .. +12 dB

The Update button on the bottom of the dialog assigns the audio channels to the sources in
the indicated way. The Reset button restores the default values, but it does not update!

An explanation of definition and ballistics of the audio bars and phase bars is given below:

The audio bars are displayed according to the respective international standard:

BBC PPM, DIN, Nordic Peak Program Meter IEC 60268-10 International standard
VU, Extended VU Volume Indicator meter IEC 60268-17 International Standard
AES/EBU Digital audio peak level meter IEC 60268-18 International standard

Ballistics is integration time and decay time of the audio level meters. It is built in accordance to the above men-
tioned international standards with the following meaning:
• Integration time is the time between the moment when the indication passes the specified lower point of
the scale and the moment when the pointer reaches the reference indication.
• Decay time is the time between the removal of a steady-state input signal (corresponding to reference
indication) and the moment when the indication passes a specified lower point of the scale.
Ballistics of the audio phase meters is built as follows:
• Integration time is the time between the moment when the indication passes the 0 point of the scale and
the moment when the pointer reaches +1 (or –1).
• Decay time is the time between the removal of a steady-state input signal (corresponding to +1 or –1 indi-
cation) and the moment when the indication reaches the 0 indication.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-53
 5. Menu and toolbar

Alarm tab
On the Alarm tab the alarms can be configured. The meaning of the alarms and their value ranges are explained
in section 7.1 Source related errors. Also a tally can be selected. To enable an alarm or a tally to be shown select the
alarm or tally name in the select alarm list. Its name is then displayed red. Click the Enabled checkbox to acti-
vate it. The bullet in front of the alarm’s name becomes green instead of red. With the Delay (seconds) box the
seconds are indicated which pass between the alarm is detected and it is displayed. With the automatic
clearing checkbox it can be selected whether alarms are automatically cleared within a Delay of seconds or not.

One tally may at one time only be used for one alarm method:
• tally is enabled on the Alarm tab of the Source properties dialog (Setting of this tab),
• Set Tally on alarm on the Tally tab of the Source properties dialog,
• Enable tally on alarm is selected on the Alarm tab of the Module properties dialog; please
refer also to section 5.3.4 Setup module.
If one tally is already enabled in one of the other mentioned dialogs, it will not be available in the
tally list of this dialog.

With the five checkboxes Logging, Show in objects, Show in alarm list, Ring buzzer, Send SNMP it can be
selected on which interfaces an alarm shall be reported.
If Ring buzzer is enabled, on the wall alarms area the buzzer toggle button must also be activated to be able to
ring the buzzer, please see section 5.2.2 Wall alarms area.
If an SNMP trap shall be sent, in the setup module dialog, SNMP must be configured, please see section 5.3.4
Setup module (Network Tab). The Use interval checkbox enables to report errors within user defined time inter-
vals. These intervals can be created and edited with the Define intervals dialog. Click the Define intervals but-
ton to open the dialog.
Dependent on the selected error a Level slider allows setting the level for an alarm.

The alarms audioloss and audiooverlevel are set in dBu; nevertheless, the audio bars are dis-
played with the configured scale type.

If the alarm settings are applied to audio sources of NGM-164, then for the audio alarms
Audioantiphase<0, Audioantiphase<45, Audioantiphase<90 and Audiooverlock not only the
chosen channel is configured but also the corresponding channel in pair. A configuration for audio
channel 0 is automatically also applied to audio channel 1, and so on. If audio channel 1 is linked
to another source and configured later on, then these settings are also applied to audio channel 0
and its original configuration gets overwritten.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-54
 5. Menu and toolbar

Figure 5-38
Source properties dialog – Alarm tab

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-55
 5. Menu and toolbar

Alarm tab – Define intervals

Intervals are used to specify times during which alarms shall be monitored. These time spans are listed in the
Active at field. Also the lack of an alarm can be reported. These time spans are listed in the Active and inverted
at field. Active and inverted serves to detect for example the presence of a video signal when there is no signal
expected.
The first line of the dialog is used to add a new interval. Insert the name in the New interval box and click Add.
Now the new interval name can be found in the second line in the Interval list. An interval can also be deleted
by selecting it within the Interval list and clicking Delete. To configure the time intervals select the interval’s
name from the Interval list. Now you can specify a time span in the third row. You can choose, if alarms shall be
active at this time span (click on the Add button on the right of the Active at field) or active and inverted (click
on the Add button on the right of the Active and inverted at field). Within a field multiple time spans can be
listed. To delete a time span out of a list, select the time span with the mouse and click on the Delete button on
the right of the respective field.
It is sufficient to define an interval once. It then is applicable for each source.

Figure 5-39
Source properties dialog – Define intervals dialog

Tally tab
On the Tally tab the tallies can be configured. In general a tally can be a hardware input tally, a hardware output
tally or a software tally. Please refer to the HYDRA user’s manual to see how many tallies are supported by which
card.

The dialog allows only selecting those tallies that are really available. Tallies not supported by the
input card are grayed out.
If a distinct tally is in use for module alarms, please refer to section 5.3.4 Setup module (Alarm tab),
then it can no longer be switched to hardware input, because a hardware input tally can not be
used for module alarms. Hardware input is grayed out in that case. This implies also, that a tally
that shall be used for module alarms must first be set to be a hardware output tally or a
software tally.

The following additional functionality can be assigned to a tally:

• Scramble source on tally
The video source is scrambled with a 70% level, as long as the tally is set. If scrambling is set in the video
object properties, this has the priority and Scramble source on tally can not be seen.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-56
 5. Menu and toolbar

• Start timer on tally

A count-up timer is placed in the first UMD line next to the UMD text starting with 00:00:00, when the tally is
set. When the tally is cleared the counter gets removed. This can for instance be used to show the time a
program is running by setting the tally when the program starts and clearing it when it is done. In combina-
tion with Set tally on alarm this can be used to show how long an alarm is present.
• Set tally on alarm
A tally is set if an alarm of the source is detected. The tally is cleared as soon as the alarm is no longer ac-
tive.

Only tallies that are configured as hardware output tallies or as software tallies can be used and
are itemized; please refer also to section 5.3.7 Setup source (Tally tab).

One tally may at one time only be used for one alarm method:
• Set Tally on alarm on the Tally tab of the Source properties dialog, (Setting of this tab)
• tally is enabled on the Alarm tab of the Source properties dialog,
• Enable tally on alarm is selected on the Alarm tab of the Module properties dialog, please
refer also to section 5.3.4 Setup module.
If one tally is already enabled in one of the other mentioned dialogs, it will not be available in the
tally list of this dialog.

Figure 5-40
Source properties dialog – Tally tab

The appearance of the tallies is associated with the object. The respective settings can be set in the Edit object
dialog box – Properties tab – Tally tab, see section 5.6.4 Edit object… .

When displaying tallies together with other on-screen information, e.g. audio meters, artifacts
may appear on the screen. This might happen, if tallies are set to visible (Edit object – Properties
– Tally tab) and at the same time either UMDs are not selected or UMDs are selected together
with the inside option (Edit object – UMD tab).

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-57
 5. Menu and toolbar

VBI tab
For sources of a Quad SDI video card or a Quad analog video card also the VBI tab is available. By means of this
tab the line where vertical interval time code (VITC) is contained can be selected for PAL or NTSC sources.

Copy tab
The Copy tab serves to copy properties of the selected source to other sources. The active source is indicated in
the title bar. Those sources that shall have the same properties can be selected from the Sources list on the
right. Multiple sources can be selected by clicking with the mouse on them while the Ctrl key is pressed. Addi-
tionally the Select all button can be used to select all sources and the Select none button can be used to dese-
lect all currently selected sources.
The five checkboxes Video, Audio, Alarm, Tally and ACG Control serve to determine which properties are cop-
ied. Audio, Alarm and Tally refer to the properties, which have been specified on the respective tabs. Video
refers to all properties on the Video tab except the Automatic Chrominance Gain Control property. This is se-
lected separately with the ACG Control checkbox.
Finally with the Copy to button the selected properties are assigned to the selected sources.

Figure 5-41
Source properties dialog – VBI tab and Copy tab

5.3.8 Freeze, unfreeze source

With the toggle command Freeze/unfreeze source the source of the selected object can be frozen or
unfrozen. On the projection module a frozen source is marked with the writing FREEZE in it.
If there is no source assigned to the selected object, this command is of no effect.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-58
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.4 Layout
A layout contains the arrangement of the objects and their properties as well as a background. It comprises what
is displayed on one projection module. A layout can be saved, edited and deleted. Furthermore its background
can be defined.
The related commands are in the Layout menu, in the Layout toolbar as well as in the layout shortcut menus.

Figure 5-42
Layout toolbar, menu and shortcut menu

5.4.1 Module layout

New layout
The command New layout opens a new layout without any objects on it and a 4 by 4 grid. It refreshes the work
area. The background color has the default value.

This command is also accessible via the button.

Load layout…
The command Load layout opens the Load layout dialog. In brackets in the title bar of the dialog the available
size on the flash disk in KB is indicated. In the Load layout dialog box click on the name of the layout you want
to load or type the name into the filename box and press OK.
The layout will be displayed on the work area.

Figure 5-43
Load layout dialog

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-59
 5. Menu and toolbar

Save layout…
With the Save layout dialog a layout can be saved. In the Save layout dialog box type the template name into
the Filename box and press OK.

This command is also accessible via the button.

Save layout as…

A layout can also be saved under another name. With the command Save layout as… the dialog box can be
opened. Type the layout name in the Filename box and press OK.

Delete layout…
With the Delete layout dialog box a layout can be deleted.
To delete one of the stored layouts, open the Delete layout dialog box. In the Delete layout dialog box click on
the name of the layout you want to delete or type the name into the filename box and press OK.

5.4.2 Setup layout

The command Setup layout… opens the Layout properties dialog box. The settings of this dialog determine the
background of the selected layout.
A background color can be chosen. If Bitmap is selected a file can be used as background. Section 8.1 Data
structure and data access contains an instruction how to make bitmaps accessible to the HYDRA. A bitmap can either
be centered, tiled or scaled.
If Enable external overlay is chosen, input from the overlay input card can be displayed by using it as back-
ground, please refer to section 8.3 Redundant operation.

Figure 5-44
Layout properties – dialog box

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-60
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.5 Group (selection)

In the Group menu you find the commands to select objects to a group as well as the operations which can be
performed on an object selection. A selection is used as a temporary group to facilitate editing. A group selection
is not saved in a layout.
Objects can be selected and deselected. Object properties can be loaded to all objects of the group. The whole
group can be deleted, stacked or hidden. The sources of all contained video objects can be frozen and the objects
can be aligned. Only one selection is possible at a time.

Figure 5-45
Selection toolbar, Edit selection toolbar and Group menu

5.5.1 Enable group selection

The command Group selection must be checked to enable all other commands in the Group menu and in the

Selection and Edit selection toolbar. The or button indicates whether Group selection is enabled or
not.
To switch Group selection, also the shortcut key Alt+G can be used.

If the Group selection is enabled, a double click on an object does not longer open the Edit
object dialog but adds and removes the object to the group.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-61
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.5.2 Selecting objects

Select all objects

The command Select all objects selects all objects on the work area.

To select all objects, use also the shortcut key Alt+A or the button.

Unselect all objects

The command Unselect all objects deselects all objects.

To deselect all objects, use also the shortcut key Alt+U or the button.

Select objects
The command Select objects supports to select multiple objects by means of the mouse. It enables to span a
rectangular array. All objects lying completely or partly within this array will toggle their selection state. If anew
a rectangular shall be drawn, then the command Select objects must be chosen again.

To select objects, use also the shortcut key Alt+O or the button.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-62
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.5.3 Load, cut and paste object properties

The following commands have mostly the same function as the respective commands for a single object. They
help to assign object properties, but instead of assigning it to a single object they are assigned to all objects of
the selection. All properties of an object except position, size and the source can be saved as template and reas-
signed. For comparison please refer to section 5.6.5 Cut, copy, paste and paste new object properties.

Load objects
With the command Load objects... the Load objects dialog box is opened. In brackets in the title bar of the dia-
log the available size on the flash disk in KB is indicated. The properties of a saved object can be assigned to all
objects that are selected on the work area by clicking the name of the object properties you want to load or type
the name into the Filename box and press OK.

Figure 5-46
Load objects dialog box

To load objects, use also the button.

Cut objects
This command deletes all objects of the selection.

In contrary to the command Cut object with this command here there are no object
properties copied to the clipboard.

To delete objects, use also the button.

Paste objects
This command assigns to all objects of the selection the object properties of a single object which were copied
before by means of the commands copy object or cut object, please refer to section 5.6.5 Cut, copy, paste and paste
new object properties. Also the name of the original object is copied to the selected object. The selected objects
maintain their originally assigned sources.

To paste objects, alternatively use the button.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-63
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.5.4 Stacking order of objects

Move objects to front

The command Move objects to front stacks the selected objects to the topmost position. The stacking order
within the selection remains.

To stack the objects, alternatively use the button.

Move objects to back

The command Move objects to back stacks the selected objects to the undermost position. The stacking order
within the selection remains.

To stack the objects, alternatively use the button.

5.5.5 Hide/unhide objects

By default an object can be displayed on the display area as soon as object properties are assigned to it. But an
object can also be hidden. Then it is crossed out in the work area and after an update invisible in the display
area, please refer also to section 5.6.7 Hide/unhide object.
Applying the command Hide/unhide objects to a selection of objects changes the visibility for each object de-
pending on the state it had before.

Alternatively the button (Hide/unhide objects) from the button bar can be used.

5.5.6 Freeze, unfreeze sources

With the toggle command Freeze/unfreeze sources the freezing state of all sources of the selected objects gets
changed. This means all sources that were running become frozen and vice versa. On the projection module a
frozen source is marked with the writing FREEZE in it. If there is no source assigned to the selected object, this
command is of no effect. To freeze or unfreeze a single source, please refer to section 5.3.8 Freeze, unfreeze source.

Alternatively the button (Hide/unhide objects) from the button bar can be used.

5.5.7 Align objects

By means of the commands Align horizontally, Align vertically and Align both a selection of objects can be
aligned to each other.

Align horizontally
The command Align horizontally aligns all objects of the selection whose Y coordinates overlap. The upper sides
of these objects will be aligned to the upper side of the object, which is most left.

Figure 5-47
Horizontal alignment of a selection

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-64
 5. Menu and toolbar

In the figure above the blue video object is the most on the left. The red logo object and the black clock object
are aligned to its upper side. The Y coordinates of the teal application object do not overlap with the other ob-
jects; therefore it is not aligned.

Align vertically
The command Align vertically aligns all objects of the selection whose X coordinates overlap. The upper sides of
these objects will be aligned to the left side of the most top of these objects.

Figure 5-48
Vertical alignment of a selection

Here the X coordinates of three objects overlap. They get aligned vertically. The blue video object remains un-
aligned.

Align both
The command align both aligns all objects of the selection in horizontal and in vertical direction in the way ex-
plained above.

Figure 5-49
Horizontal and vertical alignment of a selection

The Y coordinates of the three objects on top overlap, so they are aligned horizontally. Also the X coordinates of
the two objects in the middle overlap; they are aligned vertically.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-65
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.6 Object
Objects can be created (New object). They can be edited (Edit object…). This means various properties can be
assigned like the type, border color, position, size etc. Most of these properties can be saved as an object tem-
plate (Save object…) to the objects folder in the tree, a template can be assigned to another object (Load
object…) or be deleted (Delete object…). Most actions done with an object can be revoked (Undo) and again
restored (Redo).
An object on the work area can be cut (Cut object), the properties of an object (except position and size) can be
copied (Copy object) and assigned to another existing object (Paste object) or to a newly created object (Paste
new object).
The objects can be stacked (Move object to front / Move object to back) and the display of objects on the
projection module can be prevented (Hide/unhide object).
In each grid cell an object can be created (Fill grid). An object can be expanded to fit exactly into the grid cells it
already covered complete or partly (Fit object into grid) or it can be sized to exactly the size of one grid cell
(Size object to grid). An object can also be sized to full screen (Size object to screen).
Finally for control purposes with show viewer a viewer object can as well be displayed on the monitor con-
nected to the operator PC.
All these above mentioned operations can be performed by means of the Object menu or the shortcut menu and
the layout, edit object and object toolbar. They are described in detail in the following:

Figure 5-50
Layout toolbar, Edit object toolbar, Object toolbar, Object menu and shortcut menu

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-66
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.6.1 Undo and redo

With the Undo last action button most of the actions done with an object can be revoked.

Explicit exceptions are all kind of Save, Load and Delete actions. They can not be revoked.

Pressing the redo button restores actions which were revoked before.

5.6.2 New object and fill grid

New object
The command New object creates a new object on the work area. The object is located in the upper left corner
and has the size of one grid cell. Objects that have already been there remain under the newly created object. A
new object has no certain properties except size, position and the default standard name.
The default name of the object that was created first is Object 1, for the next object it is Object 2, etc. If an ob-
ject is deleted or renamed, then its default name is no longer in use and that name will be used if anew an ob-
ject is created. (If an object type has been assigned to an object, then the default name is changed according to
the object type and counting starts again with 1, e.g. Video 1, Video 2, ...)

To create a new object, use also the shortcut key Ctrl+O or the button.

Fill grid
The command Fill grid creates in each cell of the grid a new object. Objects that have already been there remain
under the newly created objects.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-67
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.6.3 Load, save or delete objects

Load object…
The properties of an object except position, size and the source can be saved and stored in templates. The saved
object-properties templates are listed in the tree structure under the Objects entry. To assign one of the stored
object templates to an object on the work area, the respective object must be selected. The properties layout can
be assigned either by clicking on an Objects entry in the tree structure or by opening the Load object dialog box
from the object menu. In the Load object dialog box, click on the name of the object properties you want to
load or type the name into the Filename box and press OK.

Figure 5-51
Load object dialog box

Save object…
With the Save object dialog the properties of the selected object, except position, size and the selected source

can be saved. The Save object dialog box can also be opened by pressing the button (Save object).
In the Save object dialog box type the template name into the Filename box and press OK.
The Save object dialog box has a similar appearance like the Load object dialog box.

Delete object…
With the Delete object dialog box an object-properties template can be deleted.
To delete one of the stored object-properties templates, open the Delete object dialog box from the object
menu. In the Delete object dialog box click on the name of the object properties you want to delete or type the
name into the Filename box and press OK.
The Delete object dialog box has a similar appearance like the Load object dialog box.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-68
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.6.4 Edit object…

The command Edit object opens the Edit object dialog box.

To open the Edit object dialog box, use also the shortcut key Ctrl+E or the button (Edit object)
The most convenient way to open the Edit object dialog box is a double click on the respective object on the

work area. But this is only possible, if the button (group selection) is not enabled, see section 5.5.1 Enable
group selection.
The edit object dialog box is very important to determine all properties of an object. It consists of the five tabs
Type, Border, Parent, Properties and UMD.

Type tab
On the Type tab the type of the object can be chosen, a name can be assigned to the object. Positioning can be
determined and finally transparency can be assigned.

Figure 5-52
Edit object dialog box – Type

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-69
 5. Menu and toolbar

With the Type list the type of the object can be determined. 13 different types are available. Depending on the
type, the color of the filling changes. Also the properties tab differs depending on the type. The following table
lists the available objects with function and color of the filling:

type function color of filling

Object default of a new object light grey
Video displays a video source
source is active light blue
source is frozen dark blue
Audio displays an audio source green
Text displays text orange
UMD displays up to 16 lines of UMD orange
Tally displays up to 16 tallies grass-green
Logo displays a bitmap red
Clock displays a clock dark grey
Timer timer functionality black
Stopwatch advanced timer functionality black
Alarm lists alarms dark red
Viewer viewer functionality magenta
Application displays applications light green
Table 5-12
Color codes of object types

In the Name box you can insert a self-defined name.

If the object type is changed afterwards, again the default name is set for this object.
Therefore it is better to select first the type of the object and to insert as second the name!
For information how the default name is built, please refer to section 5.6.2 New object and fill
grid

With the X box and the Y box the position of the upper left corner can be indicated. The Width box and the
Height box indicate the size of the object.
In the Aspect ratio list the values none, 4/3, 4/3+, 16/9 or 16/9+ can be selected. 4/3 and 16/9 apply the
aspect ratio to the whole object, this is the video, border and UMD. The two settings 4/3+ and 16/9+ display
the video itself in the indicated aspect ratio. The whole object including borders and UMD might have another
aspect ratio.
If a fixed aspect ratio is selected the object gets adjusted to this setting, in doing so the width of the object re-
mains and the height of the object gets adapted.

Position and size can be changed with the X, Y, Width or Height box even if the - button
is toggled on, see section 5.7.2 Lock objects!

The check box Transparent on video defines the transparency of objects, which are stacked on top of this ob-
ject. If a stacked object is of type video only its border and UMD becomes transparent. Objects off all other types
become completely transparent. The grade of transparency is determined by the underlying video object, see
Properties Tab - Video object below.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-70
 5. Menu and toolbar

Border tab
On the Border tab, the way the border of the object is displayed on the projection module can be determined.

Figure 5-53
Edit object dialog box – Border

The Separator slider determines the width of an invisible border that embraces the object for better visibility.
The Width slider ranges form 1 to 20 pixels. In the Color list the available colors are listed. The Border can be
displayed in plain style or in 3D style. With the Visible check box it can be selected whether the border shall be
displayed or not.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-71
 5. Menu and toolbar

Parent tab
On the Parent tab objects can be assigned to each other. One parent object can have multiple child objects.
Some commands and operations are applied also on all child objects. These commands and operations are:
• Movement of parent object on the work area
• Changing the stacking of the parent object

Figure 5-54
Edit object dialog box – Parent

An object can only serve as parent, if it has a unique name, which is also different from the object type identifi-
cation. Only these names are listed in the Name list. An object can only be a child or a parent. No further rela-
tions are possible.
To assign a child object to a parent object, the name of the parent object has to be selected from the Name list.
To split them again, none has to be selected. The position of the child object has to be indicated relative to the
parent object (Position, X Offset and Y Offset). If no offset is inserted the child object will be positioned directly
on the parent object. The child objects are always on top of the parent object in the stacking order. The stacking
order of the child objects among each other remains. If the Lock size check box is selected, the size of the child
object is tied to the size of the parent object. It will be increased and decreased in the same ratio as the parent
object.

Deleting the parent object deletes also the child objects!

Changing the name of the parent object, splits the child objects form the parent object!

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-72
 5. Menu and toolbar

Properties tab
The functionality of the Properties tab depends on the object type.

Properties tab – Video

A video object displays a video or RGB source. Additional information can be arranged over or beside the video.
On the Properties tab there are again nine tabs arranged, to configure all this information. The table below lists
the options on the various tabs and their meaning:

Tab Options description

Video Source selection and display properties:
Source A video or RGB source connected to the HYDRA must be selected
Transparency level Defines the transparency of overlying objects
Scramble level Defines the level of the scrambling
Enabled / Streams If the source is a streaming video source, then the selection of a video
stream can be enabled. This overrules the stream selection from the
source properties dialog; please refer to section 5.3.7 Setup source.
Audio Properties of audio bars
Width Width of the audio bars
Scale Type of the scale (BBC PPM, DIN, Nordic, VU, Ext VU or AES/EBU is avail-
able, please refer also to section 5.3.7 Setup source – Audio Tab above, for
more details about audio scales)
Horizontal audio Displays the audio bars horizontally instead of vertically
bars
Condense Audio Horizontal bar is only half as wide as the video window; two bars can be
shown next to each other.
Plain Scale of audio bar is visible or not
Visible Audio bar is visible or not

For audio sources of NGM-164 the scale type selected in this dialog has no influence on the
scale used for data formatting but is only used as decoration. Instead the scale is defined in
the setup NGM-164 dialog!
If one embedded or external audio source is displayed multiple times in different objects
the same scale type has to be selected each time. Otherwise the last set scale type is used
as scale type for all representations of this source!

Tab Options description

Tally Properties of the tally
Tally A combination of two out of three tallies can be selected. They are dis-
played by default on the left and right side of the video. For Quad input
cards please see the note below.
Style The color mentioned first is used to displays the left tally,
the color mentioned as second is used to display the right tally.
Shape The settings round or square determine the shape of the tally. With the
setting fill the background color of the UMD is used for the left tally and
the right tally is not displayed! The UMD is displayed irrespective of the
visible button on the UMD tab is checked or not.
Position Either the border of the object or the UMD or both can be used for the
tally
Disabled Specifies the color of the tallies, when they are disabled:
Either default colors as defined in Style, the UMD color, border colors, or
a user color selected in the Color list below.
Color Defines the user color, if selected in the Disabled list
Visible Tally is visible or not

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-73
 5. Menu and toolbar

When configuring hardware tallies of a Quad input card, there are also three tallies offered
even though for Quad SDI input card and Quad analog input card there are only two tallies
available; only the combination of tally 1 and tally 2 may be selected!
For Streaming video card no tally can be selected at all!

Tab Options description

Error Behavior of the video window in case of an alarm
Color Select the color of the object border to sign an alarm
Clear Select the color of the object border to sign a cleared alarm
Show alarm name The name of the most recent alarm that is active is displayed besides the
window border. If several alarms are active a plus sign + behind the
alarms name is displayed.
Visible The above settings are applied in case of an alarm or not.
VBI Display of various types of vertical blanking interval (VBI).
CC (US) Display of closed captions (CC).
Indicator An indicator is displayed, if closed captions are available
Visible The selected channel is displayed.
Use True Type The usage of the true type font Arial for closed captions is activated. This
Font allows better scaling capabilities for small windows and an enhanced
character set.
XDS (US) Display of Extended data structure (XDS)
Visible Display XDS or not
The XDS is displayed in the second line of the UMD, see section Edit
object – UMD tab, below.
TT (UK) Display of teletext (TT).
Indicator An indicator is displayed if teletext is available
Visible Teletext is displayed
TT page number Selection of the respective teletext page
Use True Type The usage of the true type font Arial for teletext is activated. This allows
Font better scaling capabilities for small windows and an enhanced character
set.
VITC Display of Vertical interval time code (VITC)
Visible Display the VITC of the source or not
The VITC is displayed in the form hh:mm:ss:ff, where hh is hours, mm is
minutes, ss is seconds and ff is frames.
If VITC is not present –:–:–:– is displayed instead.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-74
 5. Menu and toolbar

Tab Options description

WSS Properties of wide screen signaling (WSS) and video index information
coding (VLI)
Mode Select which signal standard is provided; other choices are enabled de-
pending on this
Color Select the color the indicator should have
Aspect ratio (UK)
Follow aspect Aspect ratio of the video object gets always adapted to the aspect ratio of
ratio changes the video
Default Default aspect ratio if the WSS signal is not available
Indicator An indicator is displayed if WSS or VLI is available
AFD (UK) Selectable, if the mode WSS/AFD or VLI/AFD has been selected.
Lines With this option selected two red lines are displayed. They mark the area
where the intrinsic video is displayed.
Indicator An indicator is displayed, if AFD is available.
Show deviation The indicator changes to the error color, if the detected video signal devi-
from standard ates from the specified standard.
ETSI (UK) Selectable if the mode ETSI has been selected
Lines With this option selected two red lines are displayed. They mark the area
where the intrinsic video is displayed.
Indicator An indicator is displayed if ETSI is available
Action Safe Enabled Activates the display of the action safe or graphics safe border
/ Graphics
Safe
Width Thickness of the border in pixels
Color Color of the border; any color but black is visible on video
Shadow Enabled Activates the display of a border shadow
Color Color of the border shadow
X-dist / Y-dist Distance of the video border to the action safe or graphics safe border in
steps of thousandths of the video dimensions
4/3 / 16/9 Sets the default settings for videos with 4/3 or 16/9 aspect ratio
Markers Enabled Activates the display of two vertical markers
Width Thickness of the markers
X-dist Distance of the video border to the marker in steps of thousandths of the
video dimensions
Color Color of the markers; any color but black is visible on video
Table 5-13
Options on the video properties tabs

Properties where a region is indicated, can only be selected if the respective region is
selected for the module, please refer to section 5.3.4 Setup module, otherwise these properties
appear dimmed.

Please refer to the HYDRA user’s manual to see which properties are supported by which
input cards.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-75
 5. Menu and toolbar

Figure 5-55
Edit object dialog box – Properties tabs of video

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-76
 5. Menu and toolbar

Properties tab – Audio

An audio object is used to display the audio sources assigned to one video or RGB signal. The video/RGB signal
itself is not shown. For an audio object there are two tabs available on the Properties tab. The table below lists
the options on the tabs and their meaning:

For audio sources of NGM-164 the scale type selected in this dialog has no influence on the
scale used for data formatting but is only used as decoration. Instead the scale is defined in
the setup NGM-164 dialog!
If one embedded or external audio source is displayed multiple times in different objects
the same scale type has to be selected each time. Otherwise the last set scale type is used
as scale type for all representations of this source!

Tab Options Description

Audio Source selection and display properties:
Source Select a video or RGB source, connected to the HYDRA
Width Determine the width of the audio bars
Background Select an iSTUDIO color for the background.
Scale Select the type of the scale (BBC PPM, DIN, Nordic, VU, Ext VU or
AES/EBU is available, please refer also to section 5.3.7 Setup source – Audio
Tab above, for more details about audio scales)
Horizontal audio Displays the audio bars horizontally instead of vertically
bars
Condense Audio Horizontal bar is only half as wide as the video window; two bars can be
shown next to each other.
Plain Select whether the bars are displayed plain or not
Error Behavior of the audio window in case of an alarm
Color Select the color of the object border to sign an alarm
Clear Select the color of the object border to sign a cleared alarm
Show alarm name The name of the most recent alarm that is active is displayed besides the
window border. If several alarms are active a plus sign + behind the
alarms name is displayed.
Visible The above settings are applied in case of an alarm, if selected.
Table 5-14
Options on the audio properties tabs

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-77
 5. Menu and toolbar

Figure 5-56
Edit object dialog box – Properties tabs of audio

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-78
 5. Menu and toolbar

Properties tab – Text

The text object is able to display up to 16 lines of text. By means of the Properties tab of the object up to four
lines can be edited and displayed. If more than four lines shall be displayed, the XML open protocol can be used,
please refer to section 11.3.9 Object related commands (Adjust Text).
On the Properties tab text fields you can insert text. If the checkbox of a text field is selected, the text is dis-
played in the object with the alignment, font type and size, foreground and background color as specified in the
lists on the lower part of the tab.

Properties tab – UMD

The UMD object serves to display in an object for its own up to 16 UMD lines. From the Lines list the required
number of lines can be selected. According to this choice, on the left side the corresponding account of num-
bered items gets activated and their digit is displayed black instead of gray. To edit the properties of one UMD
line first click on the respective item on the left. Its digit then turns to red instead of black. First select by means
of the option buttons Text and Variable, if you want to enter the text for this UMD line manually into the text
box behind Text or if you want to select a UMD variable of the XML open protocol from the variable list. Please
refer also to section 11.3.9 Object related commands (Adjust Variable).
The alignment of the writing can be assigned with the Alignment list, while font type and size can be assigned
with the Font lists. The Foreground and Background lists determine the color of the writing and background.
For UMD lines of type Variable the foreground and background can as well be set by means of the HYDRA open
protocol. In this case, the checkboxes before the lists must be cleared. The color of the separator between the
single UMD lines is set with the Separator list, its height is set with the Height bar.

Figure 5-57
Edit object dialog box – Properties of text (left) and Properties of UMD (right)

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-79
 5. Menu and toolbar

Properties tab – Tally

The Tally object displays a matrix of up to 16 tallies. With the X and Y lists the number of tallies in X (horizontal)
and Y (vertical) direction can be determined. First select the number of tallies in X direction because the number
of available tallies in Y direction depends on this. Depending on this selection on the left side there is displayed
the corresponding amount of items with their matrix coordinates. With the Background and Grid lists the colors
of background and grid of the whole object is set. Width determines the width of the grid lines in pixels.
Selecting a tally item on the left side of the dialog enables to edit its properties. Either a Source tally or a source
independent Software tally can be selected. A source tally is a hardware or software tally as used in the Setup
source dialog. For such a tally one number of the Source list must be selected. This list considers 3 tallies per
source in the order of the sources, please see below:

Number in the list Tally

0 Tally 1 of source 0
1 Tally 2 of source 0
2 Tally 3 of source 0
3 Tally 1 of source 1
... ...
The source independent software tallies are defined in the HYDRA open protocol, please refer also to section
11.3.10 Tally related commands (Adjust tally)). The Software list provides 256 entries (0 - 255) for such predefined
tallies.
With Shape the shape of the tally can be set to round or square. On and Off define the color for the on and off
state of the tally.
The state checkbox is only applicable, if software tallies are selected.
If the state checkbox is selected, then the tally colors are used as defined with On and Off above and the state
of the tally can be switched with the adjusttally command of the Hydra open protocol.
If the state checkbox is deselected, then the color of the tally can be overwritten with the adjusttally command.
Please refer to section 11.3.10 Tally related commands for more detailed information.
If the Text checkbox is selected, a text entered in the text box behind it is displayed on top of the tally. With
Foreground, Font and Alignment the appearance of the text can be determined.

Figure 5-58
Edit object dialog box –Properties of tally; upper part (left) and lower part (right)

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-80
 5. Menu and toolbar

Properties tab – Logo

With a logo-object a bitmap can be displayed on the projection module. Non-animated as well as animated bit-
maps can be displayed. The logo can be loaded. Non-animated logos may have gif, jpg or bmp format. Animated
logos may have gif, mpg or avi format.
Whether the checkbox Animation is selected or not, determines if the Name list shows the animated or the
non-animated bitmaps.
To transfer bitmaps to the HYDRA, please see section 8.1 Data structure and data access.

Properties tab – Clock

A clock-object displays a clock. Different types are available. If the Digital checkbox is disabled, then an analog
clock is displayed. If in addition the Logo-clock checkbox is enabled, then a bitmap is used as background for the
clock. The bitmap could be e.g. a logo. The bitmap can be selected from the list located to the right of the check-
box. How to add files to this list can be seen in section 8.1 Data structure and data access. When enabling the logo-
clock, then the digital checkbox gets automatically disabled.
If the checkbox Digital as enabled, then a clock with digital display is used. In addition it can be chosen whether
the digits are morphing or not and if it is counted up to 12 or up to 24 hours.
Usually a clock displays the time according to the timezone specified in the module properties. If the checkbox
Timezone is enabled, then for this clock a different timezone can be selected. After clicking the ... button ap-
pears the same dialog as explained in section 5.3.4 Setup module. In addition time offset can be specified. Just
select the respective number of hours from the Offset list. This property can be used for analog clocks or digital
clocks, but only after morphing is selected.
Finally for the Foreground and the Background of the clock the iSTUDIO colors are available.

When clocks are put ahead due to day light savings or for other reasons clocks will adapt to this
time within one minute.

Figure 5-59
Edit object dialog box – Properties of logo (left) and Properties of clock (right)

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-81
 5. Menu and toolbar

Properties tab – Timer

The timer counts downwards to the indicated time. When the time is reached it counts onwards. The time can
either be inserted in 24 hours mode or in am/pm mode. Therefore the respective option button must be se-
lected. With the Tomorrow checkbox additional 24 hours are added to the specified time. With the Foreground
and Background list the colors for the foreground and the background can be chosen.

Properties tab – Stopwatch

The Stopwatch object provides advanced timer functionality. Start and stop point of the timer must be indicated
(Start at and Stop at). A time period of up to 24 hours can be set. Time is specified in the form HH.MM.SS or if
the Frames checkbox is selected in the form HH.MM.SS.FF with the frames counting from 0 to 24 (for PAL
sources only).
If the Countdown checkbox is selected it is counted downwards from the indicated time difference unless zero.
If not selected it counts the opposite way around.
Alternatively the object can be used as a clock which shows the time of an LTC signal which is inserted via the
D15 connector of the overlay input card. Therefore enable the use LTC checkbox.
By means of the lists in the lower part of the tab the appearance of the object can be determined. Font specifies
the font type and size, Foreground specifies the color of the writing before start time and at the beginning of
counting, Transition is the color of the writing in the last 10 seconds before stop time is reached. At stop time
the writing gets the color determined in the Destination list. The Background color remains all the time un-
changed.

Figure 5-60
Edit object dialog box – Properties of timer (left) and Properties of stopwatch (right)

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-82
 5. Menu and toolbar

Properties tab – Alarm

The alarm object provides a list of the alarms that occur on the HYDRA module that displays the alarm object. The
alarms are sorted by their occurrence, where the latest alarm is listed most top. The alarm object can be sized as
big as required. If there are anyhow more alarms than fit in the object, the least recent once will not be dis-
played.
By means of the lists on the Properties tab, the font type and size of the writing and its color (Foreground) can
be chosen as well as the color of the grid and of the background.

Properties tab – Viewer

The viewer serves to display different viewer applications. This could be for example a remote monitor of a
WinVNC server or a Pixelmetrix DVStation desktop viewer. The VNC software to setup a remote monitor and the
viewer can be found on the iSTUDIO documentation CD ROM R5976593 in the directory:
3rdparty/research_att/vnc_x86_win32/winvnc/
Please see also the VNC documentation for the installation of the WinVNC server.
Due to performance reasons it is recommended to use not more than four viewer objects at the same time.
Within the Properties tab the IP address of the remote computer, whose display shall be showed must be in-
serted in the Address box. The Pixelmetrix checkbox must only be selected for a Pixelmetrix DVStation desktop
viewer.
If the Scaling checkbox is selected the content of the remote monitor is scaled to fit the viewer object. Other-
wise the upper left corner of the monitor content is fit to the upper left corner of the viewer object. It depends
on the size of the viewer object, if the whole monitor content can be seen.
With the Filtering checkbox a filter can be used to get a higher display quality. This is at the expense of process-
ing power of the HYDRA. Black and white can only be activated if filtering is also checked. Black and white has
the advantage to demand less processing power than the pure filtering. We recommend trying out how much
filtering is possible without slowing down the HYDRA too much.
Please refer to section 5.6.9 Show viewer for an instruction how for test purposes the content of a viewer object
can be displayed on the monitor of the operator PC.

Figure 5-61
Edit object dialog box – Properties of alarm (left) and Properties of viewer (right)

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-83
 5. Menu and toolbar

Properties tab – Application

The Properties tab for an application object contains a command line to execute an application from the direc-
tory /home/hydra/flash/apps of HYDRA.
With the Environment field an environment variable can be set for the application. This has only an impact on
this application but not to any other application. With the Environment field e.g. the local time for a clock appli-
cation could be set.
If an application has no displaying function the No window checkbox can be selected. This enables to execute an
application without displaying a window on the projection module.
To add applications to the HYDRA, please see section 8.1.1 Data access on Hydra.

Figure 5-62
Edit object dialog box – Properties of application

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-84
 5. Menu and toolbar

UMD tab
On the UMD tab the display of an under monitor display (UMD) can be defined. It provides two lines to display
additional text.
• The Visible checkbox activates or deactivates the UMD lines. The content of the lines is configured individu-
ally:
• If Visible is checked the first line is displayed at any rate.
• If the Text checkbox of the first line is selected, the text inserted in the text box is displayed. If it is dese-
lected the video name is displayed instead. The video name gets specified in the Module properties dialog
box on the Sources tab, please refer to section 5.3.4 Setup module.
• If the Text checkbox of the second line is not selected no second UMD line is displayed. If it is selected either
the text of the second text box or XDS information is displayed. XDS is displayed if it is made visible in the
Edit Object – Properties Tab of a video object.
The other options on that tab define the look and position of the UMD.
• The Font, Foreground, Background lists allow to select the font type and size of the UMD and the color of
text and background.
• The position list defines where the UMD is displayed. Horizontal alignment left, right, middle is combined
with vertical alignment top, bottom. If the two UMD lines are split this entry refers to the first line. The sec-
ond line is displayed on the other vertical position.
• The separator checkbox defines whether there is a separator in a selectable color between UMD and the
content of the object.
• The Inside checkbox can only be used for video objects. If selected the text is displayed on the video instead
of over or under it.
• The Splitted checkbox determines if two lines are displayed one under each other or separately one on top
and one on bottom of the object. The Splitted checkbox can only be used if the second line of UMD is se-
lected.

Figure 5-63
Edit object dialog box – UMD

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-85
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.6.5 Cut, copy, paste and paste new object properties

The following commands can be used to assign properties from one object to another object. The original object
might be deleted or left unchanged; the properties can be assigned to an existing object or by creating a new
one. Please refer also to section 5.5.3 Load, cut and paste object properties where properties are assigned to a group
of objects.

Cut object
The command Cut object copies the properties of the object (except size, position and source) and deletes the
object from the work area. The object properties can be assigned to another object, see Paste object and Paste
new object, below.

Also the button from the button bar or the shortcut key Ctrl+X can be used.

Copy object
The command Copy object copies the properties of the selected object (except position and source). The object

properties can be assigned to another object, see Paste object and Paste new object, below. Also the
button (Copy object) from the button bar or the shortcut key Ctrl+C can be used.

Paste object
After object-properties have been copied, another object can be selected by a mouse click on it. The command
Paste object assigns the properties (except the size and source) to the now selected object. If a video object
was copied, then source (0) gets assigned or if the object had a source before this source is obtained.

Also the button (Paste object) from the button bar or the shortcut key Ctrl+V can be used.

Paste new object

After object-properties have been copied, they can be assigned to a new object. The command Paste new
object creates a new object with these properties and locates it in the upper left corner. The name of the new
object is the name of the original object where a running number is appended. In case of a video object the
source of the new object is the first unused source of the sources list.

Also the button (Paste new object) from the button bar or the shortcut key Alt+V can be used.

5.6.6 Stacking order of an object

The Move Object commands serve to determine the position of an object in the stacking order. Please refer also
to section 5.5.4 Stacking order of objects where the stacking order is assigned to a group of objects.

Move object to front

The stacking order of objects can be changed. The command Move object to front puts the selected object to
the very front.

Also the button (Move object to front) from the button bar or the shortcut key Ctrl+F can be used.

Move object to back

The command Move object to back puts the selected object to the very back.

Also the button (Move object to back) from the button bar or the shortcut key Ctrl+B can be used.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-86
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.6.7 Hide/unhide object

With the command Hide/unhide object, it can be chosen whether the selected object shall be displayed on the
projection module or not. With the default setting an object is visible as soon as an object type is assigned. To
hide an object, choose the command Hide/unhide object. If an object is hidden, it is crossed out on the work
area. After a refresh it is no longer visible on the display area. The default for a new object is to be visible. Please
refer also to section 5.5.5 Hide/unhide objects where a group of objects gets hidden/unhidden.

Also the button (Hide/unhide object) from the button bar or the shortcut key Ctrl+H can be used.

5.6.8 Object sizing

The following three commands enable a fast assignment of an object to the dimensions of the grid.

Fit object into grid

The command Fit object into grid expands the selected object to the borders of all cells of the grid that it cov-
ers.

Also the button (Fit object into grid) from the button bar or the shortcut key Ctrl+T can be used.

If in the Edit object dialog the aspect ratio of the object was fixed, this aspect ratio remains
and the command Fit object into grid just adjusts the width of the object to the width of the
covered grid cells!

Size object to grid

The command Size object to grid adjusts the size of the selected object to the size of one grid cell. The upper
left corner of the object keeps its position.

Also the button (Size object to grid) from the button bar or the shortcut key Ctrl+S can be used.

If in the Edit object dialog the aspect ratio of the object was fixed, this aspect ratio remains
and the command Size object to grid just adjusts the width of the object to the width of on
grid cell!

Size object to screen

The command Size object to screen expands the selected object to the size of the whole work area.

Also the button (Size object to screen) from the button bar or the shortcut key Alt+S can be used.

If in the Edit object dialog the aspect ratio of the object was fixed, this aspect ratio remains
and the command Size object to screen just adjusts the width of the object to the width of
the screen!

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-87
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.6.9 Show viewer

With the command Show viewer the content of a selected viewer object can be displayed in a separate window
directly on the monitor connected to the operator PC. To be able to show a viewer content locally, the Barco Java
Applet must be confirmed when starting the iSTUDIO GUI; please refer to section 3.2.1 Connecting from a user PC to the
Hydra. Before the window shows up a dialog asks for the connection password. This is by default glad01.
A viewer window on the operator PC could look like this:

Figure 5-64
Viewer window on the operator PC

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-88
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.7 Grid
The functionality of the grid can be managed with the commands of the Grid menu.

Figure 5-65
Grid toolbar and Grid menu

5.7.1 Fixed movement

If the command Fixed movement is checked, an object will be lined up with the grid as soon as it is moved. The
upper left corner of the object will be positioned to the upper left corner of the grid cell on which the mouse
drags the object.
If the command Fixed movement is unchecked, an object can be moved to any place within the work area.
To check and uncheck Fixed movement, use also the toggle button on the tool bar to switch between the two
modes. The red corner indicates that Fixed movement is checked:

Figure 5-66
Toggle button – Fixed movement

To check or uncheck Fixed movement, use also the shortcut key Ctrl+M.

The easiest way to move objects if Fixed movement is checked, is to position the mouse in
the upper left corner of the object!

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-89
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.7.2 Lock objects

If the command Lock objects is checked, objects can not be moved or sized by means of the mouse. This pre-
vents to move them if not intended. Nevertheless objects can be moved and sized with the Edit object menu.
To check and uncheck Lock objects, alternatively use the shortcut key Ctrl+L or the toggle button on the tool bar.
The red corner indicates that Lock objects is checked:

Figure 5-67
Toggle button – Lock objects

5.7.3 Transparent objects

If objects on the work area overlap, they can either be displayed transparent or non-transparent.
• Transparent means, that the borders of the objects behind the one on the top will be visible on the work
area as well, but in a narrow style.
• Non-transparent means, that the borders of the objects behind the one on the top will not be visible on the
work area.

Figure 5-68
Transparent and non-transparent objects in the work area

The command transparent objects determines the appearance of objects on the work area.
To determine the transparency of the content of an object, please refer to section 5.6.4 Edit
object… - Type Tab.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-90
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.7.4 Maintain aspect ratio

If the command Maintain aspect ratio is checked, the used work area and display area is of the same aspect
ratio as the used projection module, but the area reserved in the GUI to show the work and display area might
be of another aspect ratio. This means that there might be some extra space that is not used for the work and
display area; it is displayed in a dark Grey above and below (left and right) of the used area.
If the command is not checked the whole available area is used to display the work area and the display area,
but the aspect ratio is not necessarily the same as the one of the projection module.

Figure 5-69
Work and display area with maintained aspect ratio (left)
and with the whole area used (right)

5.7.5 Use vertical

The Use vertical command has only an effect if the command 4 by 3 aspect ratio or 16 by 9 aspect ratio is
checked, please refer to section 5.7.6 Aspect ratio below. If grid and display are of different aspect ratio, it might
not be possible to completely fill the work area with grid cells.
The cells can either be fit horizontally into the work area or vertically. Accordingly the space not covered by grid
cells is located on top and bottom of the work area or on its left and right side. By default the grid is horizontally
fit, if Use vertical is checked the grid is fit vertically into the work area. For the alignment of the grid please refer
also to section 5.7.7 Align grid.
The figure below shows a work area with a 4×3 resolution where the command 16 by 9 aspect ratio is checked.
On the left default settings are applied, Use vertical is not checked. Space not covered by the grid is above and
below the grid. On the right the command Use vertical checked. Now the space not covered by the grid is on the
left and right side.

Figure 5-70
Work area with default setting (left)
and with Use vertical enabled (right)

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-91
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.7.6 Aspect ratio

The command 4 by 3 aspect ratio or 16 by 9 aspect ratio determines the aspect ratio of the grid cells to 4×3 or
to 16×9. Depending on the aspect ratio of the projection module not the whole work area will fit into the grid.
The command Use vertical helps to fit the grid in horizontal or vertical direction into the work area. The com-
mand Align grid to top/bottom/left/right/center helps to align the grid within the work area.

Figure 5-71
4 by 3 aspect ratio within XGA resolution (left)
and 16 by 9 aspect ratio within XGA resolution (right)

5.7.7 Align grid

If grid and display are of different aspect ratio, there might be space not covered by the grid on the edges of the
display area. The commands Align grid to top/button/left/right/center determine where this space is lo-
cated.
Dependent if Use vertical is selected or not, either the commands for horizontal or vertical alignment are appli-
cable. The commands for grid alignment have only an effect if the command 4 by 3 aspect ratio or 16 by 9
aspect ratio is checked. Please refer to section 5.7.5 Use vertical and 5.7.6 Aspect ratio above.

5.7.8 Standard grid configurations

The command 2 by 2 grid creates a grid with 2×2 cells on the work area. Respectively a grid with 3×3, 4×4 or
5×5 cells can easily be created.
Depending on the resolution of the display area and the aspect ratio of the grid cells, it may not be possible to
have the same amount of cells in horizontal and in vertical direction. In this case and if Use vertical is checked,
the wished number of cells will be fit in vertical direction into the work area, the number of horizontal cells will
be calculated respectively. If Use vertical is not checked the horizontal number of cells will fit into the display
area.
To display the above-mentioned grids, alternatively use the shortcut keys Ctrl+2, Ctrl+3, Ctrl+4 or Ctrl+5.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-92
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.7.9 Increasing and decreasing the grid

The following buttons help to configure the grid. Their functionality is not accessible by means of the menu.

Decrease grid in both directions

The decrease grid in both directions button reduces the number of grid rows and columns by one.

Increase grid in both directions

The increase grid in both directions button raises the number of grid rows and columns by one.

Decrease grid in horizontal direction

The decrease grid in horizontal direction button reduces the number of grid columns by one. If a fixed
aspect ratio for the grid is selected the rows of the grid are reduced accordingly.

Increase grid in horizontal direction

The increase grid in horizontal direction button raises the number of grid columns by one. If a fixed
aspect ratio for the grid is selected the rows of the grid are raised accordingly.

Decrease grid in vertical direction

The decrease grid in vertical direction button reduces the number of grid rows by one. If a fixed aspect
ratio for the grid is selected the columns of the grid are reduced accordingly.

Increase grid in vertical direction

The increase grid in vertical direction button raises the number of grid rows by one. If a fixed aspect
ratio for the grid is selected the columns of the grid are raised accordingly.

The maximal number of grid rows or columns is 25.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-93
 5. Menu and toolbar

5.8 Language
The language of the user interface can be selected with the option buttons in the Language menu.

Figure 5-72
Language menu

To display Japanese characters by the Hydra, in the dialogs of the user interface where text
is edited the font Mincho or Gothics must be selected, please refer also to section 4.3.2
Japanese fonts !

5.9 Release information

You find the release information in the Help menu under the topic About ….

Figure 5-73
Help menu

Figure 5-74
About dialog

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 5-94
 6. Further GUI elements

6 Further GUI elements

This chapter lists and explains all elements of the GUI of iSTUDIO not explained in the chapter above. This are the
administrator and user log in buttons, the tree and the state- and message bars.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 6-1
 6. Further GUI elements

6.1 Administrator / user mode

iSTUDIO can be operated in two access modes: as administrator or as user. The following list shows in which situa-
tions they should be used:
• administrator
The administrator account provides full access to the whole functionality of the iSTUDIO software.
• user
The administrator can adapt the functionality of the user account. This enables to protect single interactions,
like switching modules off or on, deleting layouts, etc. Working with the user mode helps avoiding changing
settings and configurations accidentally.
The administrator configures the user access by means of the Setup user mode dialog box. Please see section
5.2.6 User settings for a detailed description of the possible privileges of the user.
The Admin and User button respectively can be used to log in for an iSTUDIO session or if already logged in, to
end the current session and start anew with different access mode. When clicking on the Admin or User button
the login window appears, please refer also to section 3.2.1 Connecting from a user PC to the Hydra:

Figure 6-1
Login window

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 6-2
 6. Further GUI elements

6.2 Tree
This section provides detailed information of how to work with the tree. The tree provides easy and fast access to
different kind of basic functionality. Even though there are two different appearances of the tree – standard view
tree and fast view tree – the functionality is the same. (To switch between both views please refer to section
5.2.6 User settings.)

• Modules
Selecting one of multiple HYDRAS for HYDRA settings,
layout assignment etc
• Wall layouts
Selecting a wall layout displays it directly on the
connected projection modules
• Layouts
Displaying a specific layout on the work area
• Objects
Assigning objects properties to an object which is se-
lected on the work area
• Sources
Assigning a source to a video or audio object
• Scripts
Running a script

Figure 6-2
Tree – fast view tree (left) and standard view tree (right)

Additional functionality can be used by means of the shortcut menu that appears by a right mouse click on some
particular entries. Please see the table below for the whole available functionality:

right click on: provides access to:

modules main item halt wall, reboot wall, reset wall, reset software (wall)
individual entry halt module, reboot module, reset module, reset software (module)
wall layouts main item new-, edit-, load-, delete wall layout dialog
individual entry new-, edit-, load-, delete wall layout dialog, update layout
layouts main item new layout, load-, delete- setup layout dialog
individual entry new layout, load layout, delete layout, setup layout, update layout
Table 6-1
Entries of the shortcut menu available via the tree

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 6-3
 6. Further GUI elements

Standard view tree

In standard view tree the items of the tree are arranged in a folder like structure. To expand or collapse a folder,
double click on the red bullet or the name. The subentries appear or disappear. Multiple entries can be expanded
at the same time.
The colors of the folders have the following meaning:
• red bullet and black writing
the folder is collapsed
• red bullet and red writing
the folder is expanded
The color codes belonging to the entries in these folders are explained in the respective sections below.

Fast view tree

In fast view tree the items are arranged in a navigation pane. Only the content of one bar can be shown at one
time. Just hold the mouse for a short while on a bar or click on it and the formerly shown bar hides its entries
and the entries of the newly selected bar show up. The title of the selected bar is written in red, the titles of the
other bars are written in black.
The color codes belonging to the entries in these folders are explained in the respective sections below.

6.2.1 Modules
The modules folder or bar lists all HYDRA modules that are connected together to a wall. The way multiple HYDRAS
are assigned to a wall is explained in section 5.3.4 Setup module. The following colors are used:
• orange bullet and writing
this module is selected
• blue bullet and black writing
this module is not selected
• flashing red bullet and writing
this module has at the moment been selected
The name of the selected module is also displayed in the state bar at the 4th position.

Controlling the displayed content of a module

Clicking on one module in the list shows on the display area the currently displayed content of that module. This
enables to update the content of the work area to this module 5.3.1 Updating work- and display area and allows
controlling the display of the projection modules even if the operator can not directly see it.

Controlling the Hydra modules

The entries Halt module, Reboot module, Reset module, Set module time, Module status, Setup module of
the Module menu affect always the HYDRA module that is currently selected.

6.2.2 Wall layouts

Clicking on a wall layout loads the selected wall layout on the projection modules. This can also be achieved by
the command Load wall layout, see section 5.2.1 Wall Layout. The layout of the selected module can be seen on
the display area.

6.2.3 Layouts
Within the Layouts folder all layouts are listed. Clicking on a layout shows this layout on the work area. This can
also be achieved by the command Load layout, see section 5.4.1 Module layout.
Selecting a layout changes the color of the bullet from blue to orange and the color of the name from black to
yellow. The name of the layout is also displayed in the state bar at the 5th position, see section 6.3.1 Statebar.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 6-4
 6. Further GUI elements

6.2.4 Objects
In the Objects list object templates with defined properties are stored. These object properties contain the type
of the object, border settings, etc except size, position and source of the object. Clicking on an object template in
this list assigns its properties to the active object in the work area.

6.2.5 Sources
The Sources folder contains all sources of that HYDRA module that is indicated in the statebar (6.3.1 Statebar). Click-
ing on a source assigns this source to the active object in the work area, if this object is a video object.
By default only the video sources of a HYDRA are listed. The number of audio sources that additionally shall be
listed can be set in the Setup module dialog box, please refer to section 5.3.4 Setup module.
If a source is selected, its properties can be edited, by means of the Setup source dialog box, see section 5.3.7
Setup source.
The colors in the Sources folder have a higher variety of meanings than in other folders.
• orange bullet
the source is available
• blue bullet
the source is not available
• black writing
the source is not selected
• red writing
the source is used
• orange writing
this source is used by the active object in the work area
Furthermore a letter in square brackets indicates the type of the source:
• [A]
analog source, coming from the analog video input card
• [S]
SDI source, coming from the SDI video input card
• [H]
HD-SDI source, coming from the HD-SDI video input card
• [R]
RGB source, coming from the RGB input card
• [M]
streaming video, coming from the Streaming video card
• [-]
source is not present

6.2.6 Scripts
Finally the Scripts folder lists the once generated scripts. Clicking on a script in the list opens the Wall script
dialog box and starts the selected script. The window remains open; see the command wall script section 5.2.4
Wall script.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 6-5
 6. Further GUI elements

6.3 Statebar and messagebar

6.3.1 Statebar
The statebar provides information about the display area and the work area. It contains up to five items. The
items are explained in the table below in the order they appear:

item refers to description

resolution display area resolution of the module that is currently selected, see active mod-
ule
grid work area number of grid cells in x- and y-direction
number of objects work area number of objects that are currently on the work area
active module display area indicates which module is currently selected and displayed on the
display area
layout work area indicates the layout that is loaded on the work area
Table 6-2
Items of the statebar

6.3.2 Messagebar
The messagebar informs about the current action on the user interface. If a dialog box is opened, it displays its
title. As well it informs about mouse actions on the work area. While moving an object with the mouse it informs
about the coordinates of the upper left corner and, if resizing it, also about the current width and height of the
object.
Please see section 4.1.1 User interface, for an instruction what to do if the messagebar indicates that a dialog box
is opened but it can not be seen on the display.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 6-6
 7. Error messages

7 Error messages
The Hydra is able to detect errors related to video, RGB and audio sources and errors of hard- and software of the
HYDRA itself.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 7-1
 7. Error messages

7.1 Source related errors

Source related errors can be displayed in the wall alarms list, please see section 5.2.2 Wall alarms area. Detection is
activated in the Source properties dialog on the Alarms tab; please refer to section 5.3.7 Setup source.
The properties of these errors are listed below.

7.1.1 Audio errors

The following errors related to audio sources may occur:

Audio Errors
Audioloss This error appears, if the level of the audio source is too low. The level for this
-60.0 – 20.0 dBu error can be set by means of the Setup source dialog box on the Alarm tab.
in steps of 0.1 dBu
Audiooverlevel This error appears, if the level of the audio source is too high. The level for this
-60.0 – 20.0 dBu error can be set by means of the Setup source dialog box on the Alarm tab.
in steps of 0.1 dBu
Audioantiphase<0 Becomes active as soon as the phase between the channels in pair is negative.
Audioantiphase<45 Becomes active as soon as the phase between the channels in pair is more nega-
tive than 45°
Audioantiphase<90 Becomes active as soon as the phase between the channels in pair is more nega-
tive than 90°
Audiolock There is no audio carrier
Table 7-1
Audio errors processed by HYDRA

7.1.2 Synchronization errors

The following error related to NTP synchronization may occur:

Synchronization error Description

Ntpsynchrolost Becomes active, if the NTP daemon is not synchronized or if it is not running.
Table 7-2
Synchronization errors processed by HYDRA

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 7-2
 7. Error messages

7.1.3 Video errors

The following errors related to analog, SDI or HD-SDI video sources may occur:

Video errors Description

Value
Videoblack The video data will be checked during 100 fields. If the luminance pixel data of each
0 – 255 bit pixel of each field is lower than the Videoblack level, the error becomes active.
in steps of 1 bit Only pixels of the active area of a video are taken into consideration. The level for
this error can be set by means of the Setup source dialog box on the Alarm tab.
Videowhite The video data will be checked during 100 fields. If the luminance pixel data of each
0 – 255 bit pixel of each field is higher than the Videowhite level, the error becomes active.
in steps of 1 bit Only pixels of the active area of a video are taken into consideration. The level for
this error can be set by means of the Setup source dialog box on the Alarm tab.
Videofreeze The summation of luminance pixel data over 10 fields will be compared with the
0 – 255 bit summation of the next 10 fields. If the difference is smaller than the Videofreeze
in steps of 1 bit level over 100 fields a freeze is detected and the error becomes active. The level for
this error must be set dependant of the noise of the video data. A freeze will be
never detected if the level is too low and the source is noisy. Also if the level is too
high, the freeze detection will always be active. The level for this error can be set
by means of the Setup source dialog box on the Alarm tab.
SDI Decoder Errors
Videoloss The SDI input signals passes through a variable gain equalizing stage. The SDI input
incorporates a signal strength indicator indicating both the presence of a carrier and
the amount of equalization applied to the signal. If the equalization is too high (e.g.
cable too long) or if there is no carrier (e.g. incoming amplitude too low), this error
becomes active.
Videolock A videolock error is detected if
• there is no input data detected ( no data transition over 1μs)
• the incoming data signal and the PLL clock are not phase locked
• the system is locked to a harmonic
VideoTRS A time reference signal (TRS) error is detected if
• the TRS is missing
• the TRS is in the wrong location
• the TRS is different from the one expected

Analog Decoder Errors

Videoloss This error appears if there is no sync detected within 31 consecutive line periods.
Videolock Active when the PLL of the decoder is not locked:
The HYDRA indicates a lock error when the incoming data signal and the PLL clock are
not phase locked.
Videohorlock This error appears if the horizontal sync is not found within about one clock cycle of
the expected position for 32 consecutive lines. This indicates the stability of the
incoming video. Consumer VCR’s is an example of source that tends to set this error.
Videolumaoverflow Luminance AD converter overflow detection.
Videochromaoverflow Chrominance AD converter overflow detection.
Indicators for video related input
closedcaption Active, when a closed caption signal is provided with the video signal.
TT_loss Active, when there is no teletext provided with the video signal.
Table 7-3
Video errors processed by HYDRA

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 7-3
 7. Error messages

7.2 Device related errors

Device related errors are shown in the module status list; please refer to section 5.3.3 Module status.

7.2.1 Hard- and software errors

Hardware or software errors of HYDRA and a first analysis for these errors are given in the table below:

Error message Analysis

Slot[<nr>]: <boardnr> <filename> A specific file to be loaded in an altera device on the specified board
ª not found was not found:
• Contact the Barco support
Slot[<nr>]: Altera load: <boardnr> A specific file to be loaded in an altera device on the specified board
ª <filename> not found was not found:
• Contact the Barco support
Slot[<nr>]: Altera load: <boardnr> The specific file to be loaded in an altera device on the specified board
ª <filename> is empty is empty:
• Contact the Barco support
Slot[<nr>]: Altera load: ConfDone The altera device(s) of the board in the specified slot do not confirm
ª does not answer that the configuration was successful:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
Slot[<nr>]: Altera load: Cannot load The software could not load data to the altera device(s) on the board in
ª databytes the specified slot:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
Slot[<nr>]: Altera load: Status does The altera device(s) of the board in the specified slot does not confirm
ª not answer its status to the software:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
am56InitAESBoard: TimeOut(<x>) The software could not initialize the audio board in the specified time:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
Slot[<nr>]: Xilinx load: <slotnr> The specific file to load into the Xilinx device on the audio board in the
ª <filename> not found specified slot was not found:
• Contact the Barco support
am56InitXilinx: TimeOut(<x>) The software could not initialize the Xilinx device on the audio board in
the specified time:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
am56InitDSP: TimeOut(<x>) The software could not initialize the DSP on the audio board in the
specified time:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
Slot[<nr>]: DSP load: <slotnr> A specific file to be loaded in a DSP device on the audio board in the
ª <filename> not found specified slot was not found:
• Contact the Barco support
Slot[<nr>]: DSP load: <slotnr> The specific file to be loaded in the DSP on the audio board in the speci-
ª <filename> is empty fied slot is empty:
• Contact the Barco support

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 7-4
 7. Error messages

Corrupt gmZX1 configuration The software did not configure the scaler on the analog or SDI video
input card:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
Slot[<nr>]: Overlay input only The position of the overlay input card is fixed to slot0:
ª allowed in first slot
• The position of the overlay input card must be changed to slot0.
Please refer to the HYDRA user’s manual and contact the Barco sup-
port.
Slot[<nr>]: Found already an There is only one overlay input card allowed in one HYDRA:
ª Overlay input in an previous
• The overlay input card, which is not inserted in slot0, must be re-
ª slot
moved. Please refer to the HYDRA user’s manual and contact the
Barco support.
Slot[<nr>]: Altera load failed The software did not manage to load the altera on the board in the
specified slot:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
Slot[<nr>]: Hardware initialisation The software did not manage to initialize the hardware on the board in
ª failed the specified slot.
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
Slot[<nr>]: GAP between boards not The software did not detect a board in the slot <slotnr – 1>:
ª allowed
• A board must be inserted in slot <slotnr – 1>.
• If there is a board in the slot then retry <reset module>. If the
error still occurs then the board that is not detected must be re-
placed; contact the Barco support.
Slot[<nr>]: No Overlay input found There was no overlay input card in the slot <slotnr – 1>:
ª in a previous slot
• When there is no overlay input card an overlay input card must be
inserted in slot0.
• If there is an overlay input card: retry <reset module>. If the error
still occurs then the overlay board must be replaced; contact the
Barco support.
Source input not allowed after an The software detected one or more input cards in a slot after the output
ª output card:
• The output card must always be inserted after the last input card
Slot[<nr>], Channel[<nr>]: The software did not manage to initialize the hardware on the specified
ª Hardware initialisation failed channel of the board in the specified slot:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
Slot[<nr>]: GAP between outputs The software detected an empty slot between two outputs:
ª not allowed
• If there is an empty slot: an output card must be inserted in the
empty slot; contact the Barco support.
• If there is an output card in the specified slot: Retry <reset
module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board must be re-
placed; contact the Barco support.
Slot[<nr>]: Xilinx load failed The software was not able to load the Xilinx device on the audio board
in the specified slot:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 7-5
 7. Error messages

Slot[<nr>]: DSP load failed The software was not able to load the DSP on the audio board in the
specified slot:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
Slot[<nr>]: Slot[<nr>]: Unknown The software detected in the specified slot a board with the specified
ª board type <BoardType> boardtype, that is not known by the software:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
• Check if the iStudio CD-ROM is up-to-date
No overlay input found The software detected no overlay input card:
• If there is no overlay input card, a board must be insterted into
slot0; contact the Barco support.
• If there is an overlay input card, try <reset module>. If the error
keeps occurring, the board must be replaced; contact the Barco sup-
port.
No source inputs found The software detected no video or RGB input card:
• If there are no video or RGB input cards, those cards must be
inserted into the slots between the overlay input card and the
output card; contact the Barco support.
• If there are video or RGB input cards: Retry <reset module>. When
the error keeps occurring, the boards must be replaced; contact the
Barco support.
No Output found The software detected no output board:
• when there is no output board an output board must be inserted in
the first slot after the last source input board; contact the Barco sup-
port.
• if there is an output board: Retry <reset module>. When the error
keeps occurring, the board must be replaced; contact the Barco sup-
port.
Slot[<nr>]: (output) board lost The software lost connection to the output board:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
ovly: <filename> not found The software could not find the specified file to load to the overlay input
card:
• Contact the Barco support
ovly: Failed loading DVI Hotplug The software could not load the information into the EEPROM for auto-
ª detect EEPROM matic DDC-data detection on the overlay input card:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
ovly: Failed loading eMaintenance The software could not load the information into the EEPROM for eMain-
ª EEPROM tenance on the overlay input card:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
Slot[<nr>]: Ovly Failed progamming Writing to SDRAMs on overlay input card had timed out:
ª key
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 7-6
 7. Error messages

Slot[<nr>] (overlay): Board lost! The software lost connection to the overlay input card:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
Slot[<nr>], Channel[<nr>]: Board The software lost the specified channel on the board in the specified
ª lost slot:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
Slot[<nr>]: I2c write failure The software failed to configure a hardware device with the I2C com-
mand:
• Retry <reset module>. When the error keeps occurring, the board
must be replaced; contact the Barco support.
Table 7-4
Hardware and software errors processed by HYDRA

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 7-7
 8. Advanced operation

8 Advanced operation
This chapter is finally explaining how to access the data of a HYDRA, how to upgrade to a new release of iSTUDIO
and is explaining some advanced configurations.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 8-1
 8. Advanced operation

8.1 Data structure and data access

Initially the operating system of HYDRA and all other files are stored on the iSTUDIO – Hydra boot CD R32875211.
When switching on the HYDRA for the first time a data structure to store varying files is copied from the CD-ROM
to the flash disk. In this structure the configuration, log and system files will be stored and further bitmaps and
applications can be added. The following directories are created:
/home/hydra/flash/anim/ contains animated bitmaps
/home/hydra/flash/logo/ contains images and logos (non-animated bitmaps)
/home/hydra/flash/system/ contains system-related files (e.g. startup, shutdown images)
/home/hydra/flash/config/ contains configuration files
/home/hydra/flash/timing/ contains timing files
/home/hydra/flash/save/ contains saved layouts, objects and scripts
/home/hydra/flash/log/ contains log files
/home/hydra/flash/apps/ contains user applications (e.g. custom clocks)
/home/hydra/flash/snmp/ contains SNMP related files
/home/hydra/flash/language/ contains the text files for the language versions of the GUI
You find information concerning the usage of animations, logos and applications in section 5.6.4 Edit object….

If you changed the content of the folders logo and anim a software reset is required to make the
new content of these folders visible in the GUI, please refer to section 5.2.5 Wall Control!

8.1.1 Data access on Hydra

To connect to the HYDRA data structure three different applications can be used: The Windows Explorer, an FTP
connection or a Telnet connection.

Users and passwords

Two accounts on the HYDRA are applicable to log in, the root account and a user account.
• user: ofc (limited access)
password: glad01
• root (general access)
password: glad01

Windows Explorer
On the HYDRA a Samba server is already installed. This allows easy data access to the HYDRA by simply mapping
the HYDRA file system to the Windows Explorer. To map the HYDRA use its IP address in the form
\\<IP address>\flash to connect. When prompted to indicate user name and password use the above
mentioned login information.

FTP connection
Also an FTP connection to the HYDRA can be established. Login with ofc and password glad01, the
/home/hydra/flash/ directory should be accessible for adding and deleting of logos and animations or other
files.
If you transfer files from a computer with windows operating system make sure to select binary transfer mode.

Telnet
Via telnet the HYDRA is only accessible for the user ofc. But once connected, the command su allows logging in as
root. Again the directory /home/hydra/flash/ is accessible.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 8-2
 8. Advanced operation

8.1.2 Backup / restore procedures

The HYDRA operating system and file structure is specially developed to provide a stable system with long life-
time. The CD-ROM is read only and therefore the operating system can not be miss-configured. The varying files
are written on a flash disk. The access to the files on the flash disk is explained in the HYDRA user’s manual.

Backup procedure
It is recommended to make a backup copy of the flash disk as often as bigger changes to layout and configura-
tion are made. With one of the three access methods described above this can be achieved very easily.

Restore procedures
If configuration data needs to be restored, data of the backup can be rewritten on the flash disk and the HYDRA is
operable as of the state of the backup.

Don’t restore configuration files that were saved while a previous iStudio release was
running.
The configuration files are updated during the update from one release to a newer one.
Therefore former backups are not necessarily compatible.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 8-3
 8. Advanced operation

8.2 Upgrading
It is strongly recommended to make a backup of the system before upgrading, please refer
to section 8.1.2 Backup / restore procedures. In case that an error occurs and restoring the backup
fails, please contact the Barco support (10.1 Hotline).

To upgrade one or multiple HYDRA modules to the current release of the iSTUDIO software, there are two different
procedures. The first procedure is less time consuming. It is explained on this page below. The second procedure
requires more time, but can be used, if it is not acceptable that the whole wall is down for a short while.

Upgrading all Hydra modules at once

• Halt all HYDRA modules; please refer to section 5.2.5 Wall Control.
• When the HYDRA modules stops sending an output signal open the CD-ROM drive, as explained in the HYDRA
user’s manual, take out the old iSTUDIO CD and insert the current one.

Please be careful when inserting the CD, the CD-ROM drive closes automatically after a
while!

From iStudio release 1.9 on, changes in the communication protocol make it necessary that
no old parts of the GUI are any longer stored in the Java cache of the operator PC before
starting the new version. Otherwise the password will be misinterpreted and access to the
Hydra will not be possible!
Therefore follow the additional steps:
• Close all open browser windows
• Open: Start -> Settings -> Control Panel -> Java Plug-in -> Cache tab
• Click first the Clear button and then disable the Enable Caching checkbox. Click Apply!

• Close the drive and start the HYDRA modules as explained in section 3.2 Switching on and off.
• On the operator PC reset the Java Cache settings so that Enable Caching is selected.
• Check with subsection Additional actions after upgrading below.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 8-4
 8. Advanced operation

Upgrading one Hydra after the other

If you do not want to switch off the whole wall at once, but just one HYDRA after the other, then a more particular
procedure is required. In this case temporarily a new wall name has to be introduced for the HYDRA wall. Please
follow the steps below:
• Connect to one HYDRA
• Make sure, that on the Startup tab of the Module properties dialog Show active layout on shutdown is
selected, please refer to section 5.3.4 Setup module
• Change the wall name of the HYDRA in the same dialog on the General tab towards the new name and click
OK.
• Halt that HYDRA; please refer to section 5.3.2 Module control.
• When the HYDRA stops sending an output signal open the CD-ROM drive, as explained in the HYDRA user’s
manual, take out the old iSTUDIO CD and insert the current one.

Please be careful when inserting the CD, the CD-ROM drive closes automatically after a
while!

• Close the drive. Switch the power switch of the HYDRA off and on again. It will startup and continue to show
the last displayed layout.

Do not connect to this Hydra at that moment. First proceed with the instruction below!

• Proceed with every HYDRA, one after the other as explained for the first HYDRA.

From iStudio release 1.9 on, changes in the communication protocol make it necessary that
no old parts of the GUI are any longer stored in the Java cache of the operator PC before
starting the new version. Otherwise the password will be misinterpreted and access to the
Hydra will not be possible!
Therefore follow the additional steps:
• Close all open browser windows
• Open: Start -> Settings -> Control Panel -> Java Plug-in -> Cache tab
• Click first the Clear button and then disable the Enable Caching checkbox. Click Apply!

• After clearing the cache, connect to the HYDRA modules. Now the wall name of each HYDRA module can be
changed back to the original name.
• On the operator PC reset the Java Cache settings so that Enable Caching is selected.
• Check with subsection Additional actions after upgrading below.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 8-5
 8. Advanced operation

Additional actions after upgrading

When upgrading, the BIOS settings have to be considered. If till then the HYDRA has provided
output in XGA resolution, the BIOS settings might have to be changed to SXGA resolution, please
refer to section BIOS Setup in the HYDRA user’s manual.

Upgrading to release 1.6 or higher might lead to a change or loss of the source settings. To
restore the default source settings just click the default button in the source settings
dialog!

Upgrading from release 1.8.2 to release 1.9 or higher requires that the module timing is
restored manually.
After the upgrade the timings list on the Screen tab, see section 5.3.4 Setup module, is initially
empty. Therefore do the following:
• Establish a telnet connection to the module, see section 8.1.1 Data access on Hydra.
• Enter:
cp /mnt/cdrom/home/hydra/default/timing/timing.cfg /flash/timing/
• Enter y to overwrite the existing timing.cfg file
• Enter reboot to reboot the module
• With the iSTUDIO GUI select the appropriate timing.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 8-6
 8. Advanced operation

8.3 Redundant operation

If operating two or more HYDRAS, special hard- and software configurations can be made to avoid a loss of source
control in case that one display fails. Therefore a special hardware configuration is required, which allows to
insert the output of each HYDRA to the overlay input card of the other HYDRA, where it can be used as background.
Please refer to the HYDRA user’s manual for the explicit hardware configuration.
Within normal operation the output of the HYDRAS is displayed quite normally directly on the projection modules
and each HYDRA can display a layout that covers the whole display area. The input on the overlay cards is not
used. In case of a fail of a projection module, on both HYDRAS it must be switched to specially prepared layouts.
These layouts must consider the area used by the other layout, so that the whole display area is only used, if
combining them. This enables to display the sources of both HYDRAS on one display even if the area per source is
of course less than before. The figure below shows two redundant layouts that can be combined without loss of
information:

Figure 8-1
Two associated layouts for redundant operation

The layouts require furthermore that Enabled internal overlay in the Layout properties dialog box is checked,
see section 5.4.2 Setup layout please. This enables, that the output of one HYDRA is used a background for the other
HYDRA. Hereby both layouts and their sources can be displayed on the remaining display. Nevertheless any
changes to the layouts and source administration must be done on the HYDRA, where the sources are connected.

Figure 8-2
Overlaying layouts

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 8-7
 8. Advanced operation

8.4 Dual mode

Usually one HYDRA is connected to one projection module. Under certain circumstances it can also be useful to
connect one HYDRA to two projection modules who share the display information. This is called dual mode. It can
be used if:
• digital projection devices with XGA resolution are used, please refer to section 5.3.4 Setup module
• not more than 28 video or RGB sources shall be displayed together on both projection modules
The setting dual mode causes the work area and display area to represent the size of 1024×384 pixels, which is
two times 512×384 pixels. This is the amount of pixels, which is internally processed for each of the projection
modules. In the overlay card an upscaling for each projection module to 1024×768 pixels takes place for graphi-
cal background data. Video input data is scaled as in normal mode.
If from the resolution list of the Module properties dialog box a setting supporting dual mode is selected
(please refer to section 5.3.4 Setup module), the display area and work area gets an aspect ratio of 8 × 3 which is 2
times 4 × 3. Take care, that Maintain aspect ratio from the Grid menu is checked to recognize how the work
and display area changes in dual mode, please refer to section 5.7.4 Maintain aspect ratio.

It is not possible to display a video module overlapping! A video object must completely be
displayed on one of both projection modules.

The figure below shows a typical layout for dual mode:

Figure 8-3
Work and display area in dual mode

Please refer to the HYDRA user’s manual for the hardware configuration of dual mode.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 8-8
 8. Advanced operation

Dual mode with Quad-SDI input card, Quad analog input card and Streaming video card
When displaying the sources of one Quad-SDI input card, Quad analog input card or Streaming video card in dual
mode on different projection modules, some restrictions must be considered.
The four sources of the card are internally combined to two couples. The sources of channel A and channel B are
one couple and the sources of channel C and channel D are the other couple, please refer to the HYDRA user’s
manual to identify the channels. When displaying such a couple on both modules – each channel on another
module – one channel will not be displayed correctly, when located on the same area on the respective modules.
Within the overlapping area the content of the video with the higher stacking order will be visible, please refer
to section 5.6.6 Stacking order of an object.
In the figure below video 1 has a higher stacking order, which means it is more on the top than video 2. There-
fore in the overlapping area the upper left corner of video 2 shows the lower right corner of video 1. Changing
the stacking order would show video 2 completely, but video 1 would show a part of video 2 in its lower right
corner.

video 1 video 2

Figure 8-4
Displaying windows of a couple on overlapping areas

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 8-9
 8. Advanced operation

8.5 Server port configuration

The iSTUDIO software default configuration uses by default six defined ports. In combination with some firewalls
which block these port numbers, it might be necessary to change the port numbers.

Changing port numbers

The file /etc/services stores the port configuration. The iSTUDIO default configuration uses the port numbers
6666, 6767, 7777, 9000, 8882 and 8883. To edit the file, please refer to section 8.1.1 Data access on Hydra. The
relevant entries begin all with bcdhydra.

# Local services

bcdhydra 6666/tcp #internal protocol server

bcdhydra 6767/api #api server
bcdhydra 7777/udp #broadcast
bcdhydra 9000/xml1 #xml server
bcdhydra 8882/xml2 #xml server
bcdhydra 8883/xml3 #xml server

In a system with multiple Hydra modules it is important that each Hydra has the identical
port configuration to maintain good system speed.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 8-10
 9. Technical appendix

9 Technical appendix
This chapter provides tabular overview about the order codes of components used with iSTUDIO.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 9-1
 9. Technical appendix

9.1 Order codes

Documentation
R5976569 user’s manual iSTUDIO, English
R5976260 user’s manual HYDRA, English
R5976568 user’s manual HYDRA COMPACT, English
R5976593 CD-ROM iSTUDIO Documentation & Supplement
Software/Licenses
R32875211 spare software medium iSTUDIO – HYDRA boot CD
Table 9-1
Order codes

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 9-2
 10. Troubleshooting

10 Troubleshooting
Check this chapter for information how to contact the technical support of Barco.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 10-1
 10. Troubleshooting

10.1 Hotline
Feel free to contact us if you have any further questions!
• Barco N.V. Projection Systems Belgium
Noordlaan 5, B-8520 Kuurne
Phone: +32-56-368-282, Fax: +32-56-368-251
E-mail: [email protected], Web: www.barcocontrolrooms.com

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 10-2
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11 Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

The functionality provided by iSTUDIO can mostly also be accessed by means of the HYDRA open protocol or the
scripting language. The XML open protocol provides a lot of the functionality of the HYDRA scripting language in a
powerful and user-friendly way and will be extended and supported further on.
This chapter provides a reference to the open protocol.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-1
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.1 Formatting

11.1.1 XML
All formatting in the HYDRA Open Protocol is based on XML, which stands for Extensible Markup Language. This
gives a uniform and readable look to all the data that is transferred to and received from the HYDRA and is also
easily extensible.
A simple example of an XML structure is the following:
<XML>
<TAG>
</TAG>
</XML>

The whitespace is not necessary, neither are the newlines (\n). So the following structure is exactly the same:
<XML><TAG></TAG></XML>

And so is this structure:

<XML>
<TAG></TAG>
</XML>

XML and TAG are called tags. A tag starts with <tagname> and ends with </tagname>. Tagnames are com-
posed with numbers and capital letters. Inside a tag is its content, which can be for instance other tags or strings
or numbers. A tag can also have attributes, like in the following example:
<TAG ATTR1="value1" ATTR2="value2"></TAG>

ATTR1 and ATTR2 are the names of the attributes, and value1 and value2 are the values. Attribute names
are composed with numbers and capital letters. Values are placed between double quotes (").Values can be
anything. Because double quotes are already used as delimiters, you need another way to use double quotes in
values. The combination &quot; or &#34; stands for a double quote. 34 is the decimal value of the ASCII code for
the double quote.
Because & is used to specify any ASCII character, you must replace it with the combination &amp; or &#38; if
you want to use it inside the value. For instance the value "A&B" may look like this:
<TAG ATTR="&#34;A&#38;B&#34;"></TAG>

The contents of a tag can be anything, but certain characters with special meaning need to be replaced with the
following combinations either in numeric character reference or in character entity reference:

Character numeric character reference in character entity reference

unicode notation
" (double quotes) &#34; &quot;
< (left angle bracket) &#60; &lt;
> (right angle bracket) &#62; &gt;
& (ampersand) &#38; &amp;
(new line) &#10;

The Hydra open protocol deviates from the XML standard in these ways:
• Self-closing tags are not allowed
• Unquoted values are allowed, but are returned capitalized
• Tags are not case sensitive, but are returned capitalized
• XML comments are not allowed

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-2
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Some examples:
<TAG1>&#60;test&#62;</TAG1>
<TAG2>12345</TAG2>
<TAG3 NAME="tag3">A&#38;B</TAG3>
<TAG4><A></A><B></B></TAG4>

The content of TAG1 is <test>, of TAG2 is 12345 and of TAG3 is A&B. TAG4 contains the tags A and B. To
conclude this brief XML description, here is a final example:
<XML>
<MESSAGE TO="hydra" FROM="me">
<TITLE>Open Protocol Example</TITLE>
<BODY STYLE="plain">&#34;Test&#34;</BODY>
<TIME>15:05:30</TIME>
<DATE>19/06/2001</DATE>
</MESSAGE>
<TEST><TEST2><TEST3>abcde</TEST3><TEST2></TEST>
</XML>

11.1.2 Packets
A packet is the structure used to exchange information with the HYDRA. All packets have the following basic struc-
ture:
<XML>
<PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
...
</PACKET>
</XML>

Between the XML tags, there is a PACKET tag with two attributes: MODULE contains the destination of the
packet (HYDRA) and VERSION the version of the packet (describing the meaning of the contents). A major revi-
sion of the protocol may define packets with version 2.0 or higher, while a minor revision may have packets with
version 1.1. Of course version 1.0 packets will still be supported, unless it is specified they are not. Everything
described in this document relates to version 1.0, unless stated otherwise.
The response for each packet will also have this structure. If a wrong formatted XML packet is sent to the HYDRA,
you will receive an error message, please see below.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-3
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.1.3 Error notification

Unknown commands and syntax errors are reported by the XML parser and you will receive a notification.

Syntax errors
If the parser detects a syntax error it will send an ERROR message instead of the packet containing the
COMMANDRESULT.
The message may just contain the line where the syntax error was detected:
<XML>
<ERROR LINE="6"></ERROR>
</XML>

For some syntax errors the error tag contains additional information about the sign causing the error.
<XML>
<ERROR LINE="5">" Unexpected GT character "</ERROR>
</XML>

The table below lists these messages:

Identifier Sign causing a syntax error:

GT >
LT <
EQUAL =

Wrong command name

If a command name is misspelled the COMMANDRESULT tag shows an error notification containing the unknown
command name.

Send <COMMAND ID="NOCOMMAND" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="1" ERRORMSG="Unknown command : NOCOMMAND">

</COMMANDRESULT>

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-4
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.2 Connections
There are two connection types available: one for transactions and one for event handling.

11.2.1 Transactions
The following procedure describes how to get a connection for transactions:
• Create a TCP socket with the IP address of the HYDRA module and with port 8881
• Open the socket
• Send your transaction as XML formatted text
• Receive the result of this transaction as XML formatted text
• Repeat this procedure as many times as necessary, keeping the connection open
• Send closeconnection packet to server when done and close the socket

11.2.2 Events
The following procedure describes how to get a connection for events:
• Create a TCP socket with the IP address of the HYDRA module and with port 8882
• Open the socket
• Enable or disable desired events (send XML formatted text)
• Receive events as XML formatted text
• Keep connection open until you are done
• Send closeconnection packet to server when done and close the socket

11.2.3 Closing a connection

To close a connection, send the following packet, optionally wait for the result and close the socket.
<XML>
<PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<CLOSECONNECTION>
</CLOSECONNECTION>
</PACKET>
</XML>

The HYDRA answers with:

<XML>
<PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<CLOSECONNECTIONRESULT>
</CLOSECONNECTIONRESULT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

Sending an XML command does not give any feedback, which means you are not notified, if you
sent a command that the parser could not process. Anyhow, the result of the set-commands can
be checked by asking the respective properties with the corresponding get-command.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-5
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.3 Transactions

11.3.1 Definition

Transaction
A transaction contains a number of commands to be executed by the HYDRA. Transactions are always completely
executed before another transaction is processed. All the commands in a transaction are executed sequentially. A
transaction sits inside a PACKET tag and has the following tag:
<TRANSACTION SERIAL="serial" MODE="mode">
...
</TRANSACTION>

serial is a unique string (e.g. a number) to identify each transaction (necessary for the answer from the
server). mode determines how this transaction has to be executed:
• 0: complete all commands in transaction (even when some commands fail)
• 1: when a command fails, stop the transaction and thus the execution of the remaining commands
• 2: when a command fails, stop the transaction and do a full rollback (this mode might be fully supported
later on but works the same like mode 1 currently)
The result of a transaction is always sent with the following tag:
<TRANSACTIONRESULT SERIAL="serial" ERROR="error">
...
</TRANSACTIONRESULT>

Within this structure the results for each individual command are stored in the same order as they were put in
the TRANSACTION tag. error shows the number of commands that have failed (0 means no failures).

Command
Each command sits inside a TRANSACTION tag and is created with the following tag:
<COMMAND ID="name" SERIAL="serial">
...
</COMMAND>

The ID is the name of the command and the serial is the unique serial (e.g. a number) to identify each com-
mand in a transaction result.
The result of a command sits inside a TRANSACTIONRESULT tag and is created with the following tag:
<COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="serial" ERROR="error">
...
</COMMANDRESULT>

The error is 0 when the command was successful and not zero if an error occurred. The meaning of this number
depends on the command. Most commands return 1 if an error occurred and the execution of the command has
failed.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-6
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.3.2 Commands – OverView

All available commands of the open XML protocol are listed in the table below in alphabetic order together with
a short description and link to the section containing the related syntax:

Command Description
addstream 11.3.7 Source related commands, define a video stream with its parameters
adjustborder 11.3.9 Object related commands, adjust border color of an object of the active
layout
adjuststopwatch 11.3.9 Object related commands, adjust stopwatch object parameters of active
layout
adjusttally 11.3.10 Tally related commands, adjust state or color of a software tally
adjusttext 11.3.9 Object related commands, adjust text lines of a text object of the active
layout
adjustumd 11.3.9 Object related commands, adjust UMD captions of object of the active
layout
adjustumdbackgroundonsource 11.3.7 Source related commands, adjust UMD background color depending for
a source
adjustumdonsource 11.3.7 Source related commands, adjust UMD captions for a source
adjustvariable 11.3.9 Object related commands, adjust caption, foreground color and back-
ground color of a text variable
clearsourcealarm 11.3.7 Source related commands, clear an alarm of a source
clearlogfile 11.3.6 Module related commands, clear the log file on a module
deletefile 11.3.3 File related commands, delete a stored file
deletestream 11.3.7 Source related commands, delete the definition of a video stream
getalarmconfig 11.3.7 Source related commands, get the alarm configuration of a source
getalarms 11.3.8 Alarm related commands, get a list with the configuration of all alarms
getlayout 11.3.6 Module related commands, get the active layout of a module
getlistalarms 11.3.8 Alarm related commands, get a list with all the supported alarms
getlistanims 11.3.5 Wall related commands, get list with all available animation files
getlistfiles 11.3.3 File related commands, get list with all available stored files
getlistlogos 11.3.5 Wall related commands, get list with all available logo files
getlogfile 11.3.6 Module related commands, get log file of a module
getmodule 11.3.6 Module related commands, get the name of the connected module
getmodulestate 11.3.7 Source related commands, get the state of all sources of a module
getmoduletime 11.3.6 Module related commands, get time of a module
getsetupcolors 11.3.5 Wall related commands, get the definition of the colors
getsetupmodule 11.3.6 Module related commands, get the setup of a module
getsetupsource 11.3.7 Source related commands, get the setup of all sources of a module
getsetupusermode 11.3.5 Wall related commands, get the user mode setup
getsourcealarm 11.3.7 Source related commands, get alarms for a source of a module
getsourcefreeze 11.3.7 Source related commands, get the freeze-state of a source
getsourcename 11.3.7 Source related commands, get the name of a source
getsourcestate 11.3.7 Source related commands, get the current state of all sources of a
module
getsourcetally 11.3.7 Source related commands, get the tally state of a source
gettimings 11.3.5 Wall related commands, get all supported timings with their configu-
ration
getversion 11.3.5 Wall related commands, get versions of iSTUDIO software and Open
Protocol
getwall 11.3.5 Wall related commands, get the wall configuration

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-7
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

haltmodule 11.3.6 Module related commands, halt a module

haltwall 11.3.5 Wall related commands, halt all modules of the wall
initstreams 11.3.7 Source related commands, initializes a video stream in a module
loadfile 11.3.3 File related commands, get a stored file
loadlayoutandupdate 11.3.6 Module related commands, show a stored layout on one module
loadwalllayoutandupdate 11.3.5 Wall related commands, show a stored wall layout on the wall
rebootmodule 11.3.6 Module related commands, reboot a module
rebootwall 11.3.5 Wall related commands, reboot all modules of the wall
resetmodule 11.3.6 Module related commands, reset a module
resetwall 11.3.5 Wall related commands, reset all modules of the wall
savefile 11.3.3 File related commands, store a file
setalarmconfig 11.3.7 Source related commands, set the alarm configuration of a source
setmoduletime 11.3.6 Module related commands, set the time of a module
setsetupcolors 11.3.5 Wall related commands, set the definition of the colors
setsetupmodule 11.3.6 Module related commands, set the setup of a module
setsetupsource 11.3.7 Source related commands, set the setup of all sources of a module
setsetupusermode 11.3.5 Wall related commands, set the user mode setup of the wall
setsourcefreeze 11.3.7 Source related commands, freeze or unfreeze a source
setsourcename 11.3.7 Source related commands, set the name for a source
setsourcetally 11.3.7 Source related commands, set the tally state for a source
setsourcetallyonobject 11.3.10 Tally related commands, set tally state of hardware tallies of video
objects
setstream 11.3.7 Source related commands, assign a stream of a module to a source
setwalltime 11.3.5 Wall related commands, set time of all modules of the wall
softwareresetmodule 11.3.6 Module related commands, reset the software of a module
softwareresetwall 11.3.5 Wall related commands, reset the software of all modules of the wall
updatelayout 11.3.6 Module related commands, transfer a layout to a module and display it
Table 11-1
Overview of commands

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-8
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.3.3 File related commands

This section lists all commands which can be used to manage configuration files of the HYDRA wall, i.e. informa-
tion about wall layouts, layouts, objects, stream setup and encoder setup. All these files are stored in the save
folder, please refer also to section 8.1 Data structure and data access. Information about names and structure of the
files can be found in the next section, 11.3.4 File content.

Get list files

Get a list with all available stored files.

Send <COMMAND ID="getlistfiles" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

<FILE ID="4x4" TYPE="layout">4x4_layout</FILE>
<FILE ID="clock" TYPE="object">clock_object</FILE>
...
</COMMANDRESULT>

The full filename is inside the file tag.

See also deletefile, loadfile, savefile

Load file
Get the content of the specified file from the HYDRA.

Send <COMMAND ID="loadfile" SERIAL="example">

<FILE ID="4x4" TYPE="layout"></FILE>
</COMMAND>

For each file specify: name and type, type is optional

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
<FILE ID="4x4" TYPE="layout">
<LINE>...</LINE>
...
</FILE>
</COMMANDRESULT>

Between the line tags are the lines of the file.

See also deletefile, getlistfiles, savefile

Save file
Store a file on the HYDRA wall.
Note: This command stores the file without any notice, even though a file with this name might already exist.
Therefore carefully check in advance not to overwrite information you still need.

Send <COMMAND ID="savefile" SERIAL="example">

<FILE ID="timer" TYPE="object">
<LINE>...</LINE>
...
</FILE>
</COMMAND>

For each file specify: name and type, type is optional. Between the line tags are the lines of the
file.
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also deletefile, getlistfiles, loadfile

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-9
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Delete file
Delete a stored file on all modules of the HYDRA wall.
Note: Renaming a file can be done by loading it, saving it to the new name and deleting the old file.

Send <COMMAND ID="deletefile" SERIAL="example">

<FILE ID="4x4" TYPE="layout"></FILE>
<FILE ID="clock" TYPE="object"></FILE>
<FILE ID="test_layout"></FILE>
</COMMAND>

For each file specify: name and type, type is optional

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getlistfiles, loadfile, savefile

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-10
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.3.4 File content

This section explains structure and content of the layout files, the wall layout files, the stream configuration file
and the encoder configuration file.

Do not change files of other type than the once mentioned above! By doing so, you might
mis-configure the system which might prevent the Hydra from booting.

Syntax
• File location:
The files are stored in /home/hydra/flash/save/. The following sections refer to the file types:
• File names:
The stream configuration file and the encoder configuration file have predefined names. Layout and wall lay-
out files have user defined names with a definite extension. Layout files end with _layout, wall layout
files end with _wall. The first part of the name is the name that is also used with the iSTUDIO GUI. Additional
underscores might be used in this first part of the name, e.g. 4x4_video_layout is the layout file with
the layout 4x4_video.
• File structure:
The content of a file begins with _begin_ and ends with _end_, between these two lines there are multi-
ple blocks which might be of different type. A block begins with begin and ends with end. The second line
in a block lists the block type. The block type has an initial upper case letter. After the block type, follow the
entries with the assigned values: entry = value. The name of an entry is completely written in lower
case.
The table below gives an overview about type, name and structure of the different files:

type file name structure

Layout name_layout one General block, multiple different Object blocks
Wall layout name_wall multiple Module blocks
Stream configuration streams_config multiple Stream blocks
Encoder configuration encoders_config multiple Encoder blocks

• Font names:
When specifying TrueType fonts in the files, start with tt- add the font name and then add the pixel size
–xx. E.g. for mingliu1 with font size 24 the following is used: tt-mingliu1-24. The available TrueType
fonts can be found under the path /home/hydra/fonts.

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-11
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Layout
A layout file contains general information about the setup of the layout and information about the objects, their
position and configuration. A layout file contains one General block and an enumeration of different object
blocks.

Layout – General
The first entries define what is displayed on the module; the last entries define the look of the work area of the
iSTUDIO GUI. (More information: 5.4.2 Setup layout, 5.7 Grid)

entry value meaning

General the type of the block: general settings of the layout
resx output resolution in x-direction
resy output resolution in y-direction
backcolor color name from rgb.cfg file the background color
bitmap true | false use a bitmap as background
bitmapstyle center | tile | scale position of the image
bitmapname the bitmap file names (from /home/hydra/flash/logo) to
be used (if there is one)
overlay true | false use overlay signal
Info for the iStudio user interface:
gridx number of grid columns
gridy number of grid lines
grid4by3 true | false grid aspect ration 4:3
grid16by9 true | false grid aspect ration 16:9
gridusey true | false fit grid vertically
gridalign 0 = top or left alignment of the grid
1 = center
2 = bottom or right

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-12
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Layout – Object specific properties

Each object type has its own parameters. In the following the parameters for the types Object, Video, Audio,
Logo, Clock, Timer, Viewer, Application, Text, Stopwatch, Alarm, UMD and Tally are listed. The object type Object
has a special meaning. Its parameters are also parameters of the other object types. Anyhow in this document
they are only listed in the Object section below. (More information: 5.6.4 Edit object…)

Object

entry value meaning

Object the type of the block: an object of type Object (the below
parameters are also part of the blocks Logo, Clock, Timer,
Viewer, Application, Text, Stopwatch, Alarm, UMD, Tally)
name object name
left a value between 0 and resx location of top-left corner in x-direction
top a value between 0 and resy location of top-left corner in y-direction
width a value between width of the object in pixels
32 and (resx – left)
height a value between height of the object in pixels
32 and (resy – top)
aspect none | 4/3 | 4/3 + | 16/9 aspect ratio
| 16/9 +
transparent true | false transparency over video
visible true | false object is not visible on the module
borderon true | false border is visible with the below mentioned settings
borderseparator a value between 0 and 30 invisible border width around the visible border
borderwidth a value between 1 and 20 visible border width
bordercolor color name from rgb.cfg file the color of the border
borderstyle plain | 3D the style of the border
parent none or the name of an exist- the name of the parent object
ing object in this layout
position top left, top right, top The position of the parent object, where position measures
center, left center, of the child refer to.
center, right center
displacex x offset with respect to the position selected in parent
object in pixels
displacey y offset with respect to the position selected in parent
object in pixels
locksize true | false Lock the object size in the UI
lockxmul 1 | other value Information about the relative size with respect to the
parent object used to display the object in the GUI.
1 is used if parent is none
lockxdiv 1 | other value see lockxmul
lockymul 1 | other value see lockxmul
lockydiv 1 | other value see lockxmul
umdon true | false switch the UMD’s on /off
umdusetext true | false use the text line specified in the GUI
umdusetext2 true | false use the text line specified in the GUI
umdtext Text line the first text line
umdtext2 Text line the second text line
umdfont the font to draw this line in

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-13
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

umdposition Bottom left | bottom placement of the UMD

center | bottom right |
top left | top center |
top right
umdinside true | false the UMD is displayed in the video (only with video objects)
umdsplitted true | false Splits the two UMD lines:
true: first under and second above the video
false: both UMD’s under the video
umdseparator true | false draw a filled rectangle between the two UMD’s
umdsepcolor color name from rgb.cfg file the separator color
umdforecolor color name from rgb.cfg file the UMD text color
umdbackcolor color name from rgb.cfg file the background color

Video

entry value meaning

source 0 | 1 |2 | … the source number
translevel 0 | 50 | 100 the transparency level
scramble true | false turn scrambling on/off
scramblelevel 0 | 10 | 20 | 30 | 40 | 50 the level of scrambling
| 60 | 70 | 80 | 90 | 100
tallyon true | false use tallies
tallyshow true | false switch the visibility of the tallies on /off
tallystyle red – green | green – red | style of the tally, color combination
red – red | green - green
tallyshape Square | Round | Fill The shape of the tallies might be square or round or the
background color may be filled in.
tallypos UMD | border | UMD – border position of the tallies
tallydisabled Default | UMD color | The color of a disabled tally
border color | user color
tallydisabledcolor color name from rgb.cfg file When tallydisabled is set to user color, then this color is
chosen when the tally is disabled.
audioon true | false show audio bars
audioscale BBC PPM | DIN | Nordic | the scale mode of the audio bars
VU | Ext VU | AES/EBU
audioplain true | false show plain audiobars (without scales)
barwidth a value between 2 and 29 width of the audio bars in pixels
erroron true | false show errors by blinking the border
errorcolor color name from rgb.cfg file The blinking color of the border in case of an error.
clearcolor color name from rgb.cfg file The blinking color of the border, if an alarm is solved but
not yet cleared.
errorname true | false show the errorname in the object
xdson true | false Use XDS to get the program name and rating
ccon true | false switch on closed caption
ccvisible true | false show closed captions on screen
ccchannel CC1 | CC2 | CC3 | CC4 | T1 channel of closed captions
| T2 | T3 | T4
ccusetruetype true | false use a truetype font to display closed captions
cctruetypefont- the name of the truetype font (if ccusetruetype is true)
name

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-14
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

tton true | false switch teletext decoding on

ttvisible true | false show teletext characters on screen
ttpage a number from 100 to 899 the subtitle page
ttusetruetype true | false use a truetype font to display teletext
tttruetypefont- the name of the truetype font (if ttusetruetype is true)
name
vitcvisible true | false should the VITC counter be visible or not
wsson true | false switch wide screen signaling on/off
wssindicator true | false show/hide the WSS indicator
wssmode none | WSS | WSS/AFD | the WSS mode
VLI/AFD | ETSI
wsscolor color name from rgb.cfg file background color behind the video when WSS is used
wssdefault none | 4/3 | 16/9 default aspect ratio when no WSS is found
wssarc true | false let the video size follow the WSS signal
afdon true | false switch AFD on or off
afdlines true | false show/hide the AFD lines
afdindicator true | false show the AFD indicator
afdshowerror true | false show deviation from standard
etsion true | false switch ETSI on or off
etsilines true | false show/hide ETSI lines
etsiindicator true | false show/hide ETSI indicator
audiodirection V | H direction of audiobars horizontal or vertical

Audio

entry value meaning

audiosource 0 | 1 | 2 | … the source number
backcolor color name from rgb.cfg file the background color
barwidth a number between 2 and 30 the pixelwidth of the audiobars
audioscale BBC PPM | DIN | Nordic | the scale mode of the audio bars
VU | Ext VU | AES/EBU
audioplain true | false show plain audiobars (without scales)
audiodirection V | H direction of audiobars vertical or horizontal
erroron true | false show errors by blinking the border
errorcolor color name from rgb.cfg file The blinking color of the border in case of an error.
clearcolor color name from rgb.cfg file The blinking color of the border, if an alarm is solved but
not yet cleared.
errorname true | false show the errorname in the object

Clock

entry value meaning

digital true | false digital clock or not
morph true | false morphing clock or not, if digital is true
twelve true | false 12 hours or 24 hours, if digital is true
offseth a value between -12 to 12 the offset in hours
timezoneenabled true | false a distinct timezone is used

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-15
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

timezone the timezone to be used, if timezoneenabled is true;

specify an expression for a zone from the file
/home/hydra/default/config/zones.cfg
backcolor color name from rgb.cfg file the background color
forecolor color name from rgb.cfg file the foreground color
logoclock true | false clock is a logo clock or not
logo the image name to be used in the logoclock
a file from the folder /flash/logo

Logo

entry value meaning

bitmap The name of the bitmap file
a file from the folder /flash/logo (if animated is false)
or from /flash/anim (if animated is true)
animated true | false the bitmap is from the folder anim or from the folder logo

Timer

entry value meaning

backcolor color name from rgb.cfg file the background color
forecolor color name from rgb.cfg file the foreground color
today true | false destination time is today / tomorrow
stopH 1, .. , 12 (if twelve is true) | hours of destination time
0, .. , 23 (if twelve is false)
stopM 0, .. , 59 minutes of destination time
stopS 0, .. , 59 seconds of destination time
twelve true | false 12h / 24h timer on/off

Viewer

entry value meaning

address IP address of VNC server
pixelmetrix true | false a Pixelmetrix DVStation desktop viewer is used
scaling true | false apply scaling
filtering true | false apply filtering
blackwhite true | false apply black and white filtering

Application

entry value meaning

command command to start application from /home/hydra/flash/app
environment environment variables for the application
nowindow true | false Start an windowless application

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-16
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Text

entry value meaning

line0 text for the first line
useline0 true | false show this line
line1 text for the second line
useline1 true | false show this line
line2 text for the third line
useline2 true | false show this line
line3 text for the fourth line
useline3 true | false show this line
alignment left | center | right alignment of the text
font the fontname for the text
forecolor color name from rgb.cfg file the foreground color
backcolor color name from rgb.cfg file the background color

Stopwatch

entry value meaning

startH 0, .. , 23 hour of start time
startM 0, .. , 59 minutes of start time
startS 0, .. , 59 seconds of start time
stopH 0, .. , 23 hour of stop time
stopM 0, .. , 59 minutes of stop time
stopS 0, .. , 59 seconds of stop time
countdown true | false stopwatch in countdown mode
frames true | false show the frames (counter from 0 to 24)
font the font used for the numbers
forecolor color name from rgb.cfg file the color of the numbers
transcolor color name from rgb.cfg file the color of the numbers in the last 10 seconds
destcolor color name from rgb.cfg file the color of the numbers when the destination is reached
backcolor color name from rgb.cfg file the background color of the object

Alarm

entry value meaning

font the font for the text of the alarmlines
forecolor color name from rgb.cfg file the color of the text
gridcolor color name from rgb.cfg file the grid color
backcolor color name from rgb.cfg file the background color

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-17
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

UMD

entry value meaning

lines 1, 2, .., 16 the number of enabled lines
The following entries are listed per each active line with the line index (x = 0, 1, .., lines) appended:
caption[x] If usevar is false, the text is displayed
variable[x] a number between 0 to 255 selection of a distinct text string as defined with the
adjustvariable command, if usevar is true
usevar[x] true | false use an adjustvariable text
alignment[x] left | center | right alignment of the text
font[x] fontname
foreground[x] color name from rgb.cfg file the font color
useforegr[x] true | false use this font color
background[x] color name from rgb.cfg file the background color
usebackgr[x] true | false use this background color
separator[x] color name from rgb.cfg file the color of the separator of two lines
sepheight[x] a value between 0 and 20 the height of the separator

Tally

entry value meaning

dimx 1, 2, .., 16 the number of tallies in x direction
dimy 1, 2, .., 16 the number of tallies in y direction with dimx * dimy ≤ 16
backcolor color name from rgb.cfg file the background color
gridcolor color name from rgb.cfg file the grid color
gridwidth a value from 0 to 20 the width of the grid lines
tallyoverlayused true | false use text on top of the tallies
tallyoverlaycap- a textline, if tallyoverlay is true
tion
tallyoverlayfore- color name from rgb.cfg file the color of the text, if tallyoverlay is true
ground
tallyoverlayfont the font of the text, if tallyoverlay is true
tallyoverlayalign- left | center | right the alignment of the text, if tallyoverlay is true
ment
The following entries are listed per each tally with the index (x = 0, 1, .., dimx * dimy -1) appended:
source[x] a value from 0 to 179 selection of the tally of a source.
software[x] a value from 0 to 255 selection of a software tally
usesource[x] true | false use source tally (true) or software tally (false)
shape[x] Round | Square the shape of the tally
oncolor[x] color name from rgb.cfg file color in ON state
offcolor[x] color name from rgb.cfg file color in OFF state
state[x] true | false Applicable for software tallies (usesource[x] is false)
state is true: oncolor[x] and offcolor[x] are
used to indicate the tally state
state is false: color definition for a tally state set with
the adjusttally command, is used.
Please refer to section 11.3.10 Tally related commands.

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-18
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Wall layout
A wall layout file stores the arrangement of layouts for the whole wall. Please refer also to section 5.2.1 Wall
Layout for more detailed information. A wall layout file contains an enumeration of Module blocks.

entry value meaning

Module – the type of the block
name module name
layout layout name to load

Stream configuration
The file streams_config stores the configuration setting of the video streams. Please refer also to section
5.3.6 Setup streams for more detailed information. A stream configuration file contains an enumeration of Stream
blocks.

entry value meaning

Stream – the type of the block
name the name of the stream
casting 0 = unicast, type of the stream
1 = multicast,
2 = broadcast
address the multicast address to listen to
port the portnumber to use
encoder the name of the encoder used in the encoders_config file
encoderaddr the IP address of the encoder
encoderport the port to connect to
videopid the video PID

Encoder configuration
The file encoders_config stores the configuration setting of the video encoders. Please refer also to section
5.3.5 Setup encoders for more detailed information. An encoder configuration file contains an enumeration of
Encoder blocks

entry value meaning

Encoder – the type of the block
name the name of the encoder
startskip amount of bytes skipped at the start of an IP-packet
stopskip amount of bytes skipped at the end of an IP-packet
streamtype Auto | Elementary | type of the video stream
Program | Transport
usetcp true | false usage of TCP
usertp true | false usage of RTP
tcp TCP string to send to the encoder

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-19
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.3.5 Wall related commands

This section lists all commands which request information of the whole wall or which are applied to the whole
wall.
To manage the stored bitmap files the following two commands are available:

Get list anims

Get list with all available animation files.

Send <COMMAND ID="getlistanims" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

<FILE ID="barco1.gif"></FILE>
<FILE ID="barco2.gif"></FILE>
...
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getlistlogos

Get list logos

Get list with all available logo files (bitmaps).

Send <COMMAND ID="getlistlogos" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

<FILE ID="barco.gif"></FILE>
<FILE ID="istudio.jpg"></FILE>
...
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getlistanims

With the following commands configuration parameters of the wall can be managed:

Get setup usermode

Get the user mode setup of the HYDRA wall.

Send <COMMAND ID="getsetupusermode" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

<LINE>...</LINE>
...
</COMMANDRESULT>

Between the line tags are the lines of the user mode setup, see table below.
See also setsetupusermode

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-20
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

The following five lines (between LINE elements) are returned:

lines - top to bottom explanation

<LINE>adminpassword</LINE> the administrator password
<LINE>userpassword</LINE> the user password
<LINE>0</LINE> The default language is represented by a number according to the order in
the language menu in the iSTUDIO GUI, starting from 0.
<LINE>511</LINE> The user privileges are represented by the decimal representation of a bit
flag. The positions 876543210 stand for the items:
0: save items
1: delete saved items
2: halt
3: reset
4: setup module
5: setup source
6: setup module or wall time
7: setup color
8: clear all alarms
The privileges for a user who is allowed to save items and setup color
would result in the bit flag 010000001. After conversion to decimal repre-
sentation, this would result in 129.
The value 511 represents full user privileges (every flag is set).
<LINE>1</LINE> user interface settings are also represented by the decimal representation
of a bit flag. Only one bit is used:
0: use fast view tree.

Set setup usermode

Set the user mode setup of the HYDRA wall.

Send <COMMAND ID="setsetupusermode" SERIAL="example">

<LINE>...</LINE>
...
</COMMAND>

Between the line tags are the lines of the user mode setup, please see getsetupusermode above.
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getsetupusermode

Get setup colors

Get a list of the available colors in form of a list with the RGB color triples (values from 0 to 255) and names.

Send <COMMAND ID="GETSETUPCOLORS" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <TRANSACTIONRESULT SERIAL="serial" ERROR="0">

<COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
<LINE> 51 51 51 audiobackground</LINE>
<LINE>127 127 127 audiobarbackground</LINE>
...
</COMMANDRESULT>

Between the line tags are the lines of the color setup.
See also setsetupcolors

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-21
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Set setup colors

Replace the available colors with this list of RGB color triples (values from 0 to 255) and names.

This command replaces the complete existing list with the values you send. Therefore take care
that you do not delete the list by accident by sending just the desired changes. Always send a
complete list of colors!
In case that you need to restore the original list of colors you can use the colors file from the iSTUDIO
CD ROM. Please refer to section 8.1 Data structure and data access for an instruction.

Send <COMMAND ID="setsetupcolors" SERIAL="example">

<LINE> 51 51 51 audiobackground</LINE>
<LINE>127 127 127 audiobarbackground</LINE>
...
</COMMAND>

Between the line tags are the lines of the color setup.
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also setsetupcolors

Set wall time

Set date and time of all modules of the HYDRA wall.

It might take up to 30 seconds before the adjusted time is visible on the projection modules. This is
especially valid, if the time is set back.

Send <COMMAND ID="setwalltime" SERIAL="example">

<TIME>
<HOUR>15</HOUR>
<MINUTE>12</MINUTE>
<SECOND>9</SECOND>
<DAY>20</DAY>
<MONTH>6</MONTH>
<YEAR>2001</YEAR>
</TIME>
</COMMAND>

Specify: new time and date

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getmoduletime, setmoduletime

Get timings
Get all the supported timings with their configuration.

Send <COMMAND ID="gettimings" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

<LINE>...</LINE>
...
</COMMANDRESULT>

Between the line tags are the lines of the timings configuration.

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-22
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Get wall
Get the configuration of the HYDRA wall.

Send <COMMAND ID="getwall" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

<WALL ID="hydrawall">
<MODULE ID="module1" ADDRESS="150.158.196.151"></MODULE>
<MODULE ID="module2" ADDRESS="150.158.196.152"></MODULE>
<MODULE ID="module3" ADDRESS="150.158.196.153"></MODULE>
</WALL>
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getmodule

Get version
Get version information of the iSTUDIO software (HYDRA) and XML interface. The version of the XML interface speci-
fies the highest supported version of packets.

Send <COMMAND ID="getversion" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

<VERSION ID="HYDRA">1.2.0</VERSION>
<VERSION ID="XML">1.0</VERSION>
</COMMANDRESULT>

These commands trigger actions for the whole wall:

Load wall layout and update

Load and update a wall layout.

Send <COMMAND ID="loadwalllayoutandupdate" SERIAL="example">

<LAYOUT ID="wlayout1"></LAYOUT>
</COMMAND>

Specify: wall layout name

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

Software reset wall

Reset the software of all modules of the wall.

Send <COMMAND ID="SOFTWARERESETWALL" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

</COMMANDRESULT>

See also haltmodule, haltwall, rebootwall, rebootmodule, resetmodule, softwareresetmodule

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-23
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Reset wall
Reset all the modules of the HYDRA wall.

Send <COMMAND ID="resetwall" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

</COMMANDRESULT>

See also haltmodule, haltwall, rebootmodule, resetmodule, resetmodule

Reboot wall
Reboot all modules of the HYDRA wall.

Send <COMMAND ID="rebootwall" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

</COMMANDRESULT>

See also haltmodule, haltwall, rebootmodule, resetmodule, softwareresetmodule, softwareresetwall

Halt wall
Halt all the modules of the HYDRA wall.

Send <COMMAND ID="haltwall" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

</COMMANDRESULT>

See also haltmodule, rebootwall, rebootmodule, resetmodule, softwareresetmodule, softwareresetwall

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-24
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.3.6 Module related commands

This section lists all commands which are applied to one or multiple dedicated HYDRA modules or which get in-
formation of a single module.
The following commands can be used to manage module related information:

Get module
Get the name of the module where you are connected to.

Send <COMMAND ID="getmodule" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getwall

Get layout
Get the parameters of the active layout of the specified module. These are the parameters of the layout that is
currently displayed on the module. In case that the layout has been changed but the changes are not yet saved,
the parameters of the changed layout are delivered.

Send <COMMAND ID="getlayout" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each module specify: module name.

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
<MODULE ID="module1">
<LAYOUT>
<LINE>...</LINE>
...
</LAYOUT>
</MODULE>
</COMMANDRESULT>

Between the line tags are the lines of the layout.

See also loadlayoutandupdate, updatelayout

Get log file

Get the log file of a HYDRA module.

Send <COMMAND ID="getlogfile" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each log file specify: module name

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
<MODULE ID="module1">
<LINE>...</LINE>
...
</MODULE>
</COMMANDRESULT>

Between the line tags are the lines of the log file.
See also clearlogfile

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-25
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Clear log file

Clear the log file of a HYDRA module.

Send <COMMAND ID="clearlogfile" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
<MODULE ID="module2"></MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each log file specify: module name

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getlogfile

Get module time

Get the current time and date of a HYDRA module. This is the internal time the HYDRA was set to. Timezone as-
signments are not considered.

Send <COMMAND ID="getmoduletime" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each time and date: specify module

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
<MODULE ID="module1">
<HOUR>15</HOUR>
<MINUTE>12</MINUTE>
<SECOND>9</SECOND>
<DAY>20</DAY>
<MONTH>6</MONTH>
<YEAR>2001</YEAR>
</MODULE>
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also setmoduletime, setwalltime

Set module time

Set date and time for a HYDRA module.

Send <COMMAND ID="setmoduletime" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<TIME>
<HOUR>15</HOUR>
<MINUTE>12</MINUTE>
<SECOND>9</SECOND>
<DAY>20</DAY>
<MONTH>6</MONTH>
<YEAR>2001</YEAR>
</TIME>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each module specify: module name, new time and date
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getmoduletime, setwalltime

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-26
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Get setup module

Get the setup of a HYDRA module.

Send <COMMAND ID="getsetupmodule" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each module specify: module name

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
<MODULE ID="module1">
<LINE>...</LINE>
...
</MODULE>
</COMMANDRESULT>

Between the line tags are the lines of the module setup.
See also getsetupsource, setsetupmodule, setsetupsource

Set setup module

Set the setup of a HYDRA module.
Note: The new settings will be effective after a reboot.

Send <COMMAND ID="setsetupmodule" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<LINE>...</LINE>
...
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each module specify: module name. Between the line tags are the lines of the module setup.
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getsetupmodule, getsetupsource, setsetupsource

The following commands trigger module related actions:

Update layout
Transmit a layout to the module and update it.

Send <COMMAND ID="updatelayout" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<LAYOUT>
<LINE>...</LINE>
...
</LAYOUT>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each layout specify: module name, new layout. Between the line tags are the lines of the
new layout.
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getlayout, loadlayoutandupdate

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-27
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Load layout and update

Assign a stored layout to a module and update the module.

Send <COMMAND ID="loadlayoutandupdate" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<LAYOUT ID="4x4"></LAYOUT>
</MODULE>
<MODULE ID="module3">
<LAYOUT ID="test"></LAYOUT>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each layout specify: module name, layout name

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

Software reset module

Reset the software of the specified module.

Send <COMMAND ID="SOFTWARERESETMODULE" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module2">
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

</COMMANDRESULT>

See also haltmodule, haltwall, rebootwall, rebootmodule, resetmodule, softwareresetwall

Reset module
Reset the specified module.

Send <COMMAND ID="resetmodule" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module2">
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

</COMMANDRESULT>

See also haltmodule, haltwall, rebootwall, rebootmodule, softwareresetmodule, softwareresetwall

Reboot module
Reboot the specified module.
Note: If you want to reboot multiple modules and also the module where you are connected to, then put this
module on the last place in the command. It is also more efficient to use rebootwall if you want to reboot all
modules.

Send <COMMAND ID="rebootmodule" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module3"></MODULE>
<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each module specify: module name

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also haltmodule, haltwall, rebootwall, resetmodule, softwareresetmodule, softwareresetwall

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-28
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Halt module
Halt the specified module.
Note: If you want to halt multiple modules and also the module where you are connected to, then put this mod-
ule on the last place in the command. It is also more efficient to use haltwall if you want to halt all modules.

Send <COMMAND ID="haltmodule" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module3"></MODULE>
<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each module specify: module name

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also haltwall, rebootwall, rebootmodule, resetmodule, softwareresetmodule, softwareresetwall

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-29
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.3.7 Source related commands

These commands provide access to source related information and actions.
First the commands for administration of source parameters are listed:

Get source name

Get the names of sources of a module.

Send <COMMAND ID="getsourcename" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module3">
<SOURCE ID="0"></SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="10"></SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="20"></SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each source specify: module name and source number (0 - n).
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
<MODULE ID="module3">
<SOURCE ID="0">
<NAME>Video1</NAME>
</SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="10">
<NAME>Camera11</NAME>
</SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="20">
<NAME>Source21</NAME>
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getmodulestate, setsourcename

Set source name

Set name of a source of a module of the HYDRA wall.
Note: This command to set a source name is optimized for speed, which implicates that the source name is vola-
tile. After restarting the HYDRA, the source name will always be reset to that name that is configured in the mod-
ule setup. You will not see the change of the source name in the user interface source tree or module setup. But
you can see the new name in the UMD of an object using the source.

Send <COMMAND ID="setsourcename" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<SOURCE ID="5">
<NAME>Source5</NAME>
</SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="11">
<NAME>Source11</NAME>
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
<MODULE ID="module2">
<SOURCE ID="8">
<NAME>Source8</NAME>
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each source specify: module name, source number (0-n), new name
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getmodulestate, getsourcename

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-30
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Get source state

Get the current state of the sources of a module of the HYDRA wall (this are for instance the detected parameters
for video).

Send <COMMAND ID="getsourcestate" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each module specify: module name

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
<MODULE ID="module1">
<LINE>...</LINE>
...
</MODULE>
</COMMANDRESULT>

Between the line tags are the lines of the current state of the sources.
See also getmodulestate

Get module state

Get the state of all sources for a module of the HYDRA wall.
Note: Freeze is currently always 0. Further development of this element follows.

Send <COMMAND ID="getmodulestate" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each module specify: module name

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
<MODULE ID="module1">
<SOURCE ID="0" NAME="Source1"> source number and name
<ALARM>1</ALARM> 1 if at least one alarm is active
(object has a flashing border)
<FREEZE>0</FREEZE> 1 if source is frozen
<TALLY ID="0">1</TALLY> 1 if tally 1 is active
<TALLY ID="1">0</TALLY> 1 if tally 2 is active
<TALLY ID="2">0</TALLY> 1 if tally 3 is active
</SOURCE>
...
</MODULE>
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getsourcealarm, getsourcename, getsourcetally, getsourcestate

Get source freeze

Get the freeze-state of sources of a module of the HYDRA.

Send <COMMAND ID="getsourcefreeze" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module2">
<SOURCE ID="0"></SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="10"></SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="20"></SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each source specify: module name and source number (0 - n).
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
<MODULE ID="module2">
<SOURCE ID="0">0</SOURCE> 0 not frozen
<SOURCE ID="10">1</SOURCE> 1 frozen
<SOURCE ID="20">0</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getmodulestate, setsourcefreeze

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-31
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Set source freeze

Freeze or unfreeze a source of a module of the HYDRA wall.
Note: This command is not yet applicable. Further development of this element follows.

Send <COMMAND ID="setsourcefreeze" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module2">
<SOURCE ID="0">0</SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="10">1</SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="20">0</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each source specify: module name, source number (0 - n), new state.
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getmodulestate, getsourcefreeze

Get source tally

Get the state of a tally of a source of a HYDRA module.

Send <COMMAND ID="getsourcetally" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module2">
<SOURCE ID="9">
<TALLY ID="0"></TALLY>
<TALLY ID="1"></TALLY>
<TALLY ID="2"></TALLY>
</SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="18">
<TALLY ID="1"></TALLY>
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each tally specify: module name, source number (0-n), tally number (0-2)
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
<MODULE ID="module2">
<SOURCE ID="9">
<TALLY ID="0">
<STATE>0</STATE>
</TALLY>
<TALLY ID="1">
<STATE>1</STATE>
</TALLY>
<TALLY ID="2">
<STATE>0</STATE>
</TALLY>
</SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="18">
<TALLY ID="1">
<STATE>1</STATE>
</TALLY>
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getmodulestate, setsourcetally

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-32
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Set source tally

Set tally state of a hardware output tally or a software tally of a source of a module of the HYDRA wall.

Send <COMMAND ID="setsourcetally" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module2">
<SOURCE ID="8">
<TALLY ID="1">
<STATE>0</STATE>
</TALLY>
<TALLY ID="2">
<STATE>1</STATE>
</TALLY>
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each source specify: module name, source number, tally number (0-2), tally state (0,1 [,2, 3])
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getmodulestate, getsourcetally

Setsourcetally offers two additional tally states, which can only be set with this XML command
(not available via the iSTUDIO GUI).
These two additional states are only applicable for source tallies in software mode!
The two additional tally states can only be viewed, if the tally is displayed in a UMD! In a tally ob-
ject they do not become visible. In a tally object the tally states 2 and 3 look the same as the tally
state 1.
Corresponding to the two additional states the colors tally1state2, tally1state3 for tally 1 and
tally2state2, tally2state3 for tally 2 are available with the system colors.

Get source alarm

Get the state of all alarms for a source of a module of the HYDRA wall.

Send <COMMAND ID="getsourcealarm" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<SOURCE ID="8"></SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="17"></SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each source specify: module name and source number (0 - n)

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
<MODULE ID="module1">
<SOURCE ID="8">
<ALARM ID="videoloss">
<ACTIVE>0</ACTIVE>
<CLEARED>0</CLEARED>
<STARTED>15:01:30</STARTED>
<STOPPED>15:05:09</STOPPED>
<STARTEDDATE>28/9/2005</STARTEDDATE>
<STOPPEDDATE>28/9/2005</STOPPEDDATE>
</ALARM>
<ALARM ID="audioloss">
<ACTIVE>1</ACTIVE>
<CLEARED>1</CLEARED>
<STARTED>15:10:23</STARTED>
<STARTEDDATE>30/9/2005</STARTEDDATE>
</ALARM>
</SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="17"></SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also clearsourcealarm, getalarmlist

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-33
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Clear source alarm

Clear an alarm of a source on a module of the HYDRA wall.

Send <COMMAND ID="clearsourcealarm" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<SOURCE ID="5">
<ALARM ID="videoloss"></ALARM>
<ALARM ID="audioloss"></ALARM>
</SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="12">
<ALARM ID="videoloss"></ALARM>
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each alarm specify: module name, source number (0 - n), alarm name.
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getlistalarms, getsourcealarm

The following commands are useful to configure a source:

Get setup source

Get the setup of all sources of a module.

Send <COMMAND ID="getsetupsource" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each module specify: module name

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
<MODULE ID="module1">
<LINE>...</LINE>
...
</MODULE>
</COMMANDRESULT>

Between the line tags are the lines of the sources setup.
See also getsetupmodule, setsetupmodule, setsetupsource

Set setup source

Set setup of all sources of a module of the HYDRA wall. These changes become effective after a software reset,
please refer to resetmodule.

Send <COMMAND ID="setsetupsource" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<LINE>...</LINE>
...
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each module specify: module name. Between the line tags are the lines of the sources setup.
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getsetupmodule, getsetupsource, setsetupmodule

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-34
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Adjust UMD background on source

Adjust the background color for UMD lines for the specified sources of the specified modules.

Send <COMMAND ID="adjustumdbackgroundonsource" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<SOURCE ID="0">
<COLOR>blue</COLOR>
</SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="1">
<COLOR>green</COLOR>
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each module specify: module name, source number, UMD background color
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also adjustumdonsource

Adjust UMD on source

Adjust the UMD captions for the specified sources of the specified modules.

Send <COMMAND ID="adjustumdonsource" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="myHydra">
<SOURCE ID="5">
<LINE ID="0">line1</LINE>
<LINE ID="1">line2</LINE>
</SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="1">
<LINE ID="0">line1</LINE>
<LINE ID="1">line2</LINE>
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each module specify: module name, source number, UMD captions
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also adjustumdbackgroundonsource

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-35
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Get alarm config

Get the configuration of all alarms of a source.

Send <COMMAND ID="getalarmconfig" SERIAL="example">

<module id="module1">
<source id=0></source>
</module>
</COMMAND>

For each source specify: module name, source number (0 - n)

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL=" example " ERROR="0">
<MODULE ID=" module1">
<SOURCE ID="0">
<ALARM ID="videoloss">
<ACTIVATED>0</ACTIVATED>
<AUTO>1</AUTO>
<SHOWINALARMLIST>1</SHOWINALARMLIST>
<SHOWINOBJECT>1</SHOWINOBJECT>
<SNMP>0</SNMP>
<LOGALARM>0</LOGALARM>
<BUZZER>0</BUZZER>
<DELAYBEFOREACTIVE>0</DELAYBEFOREACTIVE>
<DELAYBEFOREAUTOCLEAR>0</DELAYBEFOREAUTOCLEAR>
</ALARM>
...
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMANDRESULT>

Between the alarm tags are the tags with the settings of the alarm parameters.
See also getsetupmodule, setsetupmodule, setsetupsource

Set alarm config

Set the configuration of single alarms of a source.

Send <COMMAND ID="setalarmconfig" SERIAL="example">

<module id="module1">
<source id="0">
<alarm id="videoloss">
<activated>0</activated>
<auto>1</auto>
<showinalarmlist>1</showinalarmlist>
<showinobject>1</showinobject>
<snmp>1</snmp>
<buzzer>1</buzzer>
<logalarm>1</logalarm>
<delaybeforeactive>10</delaybeforeactive>
<delaybeforeautoclear>10</delaybeforeautoclear>
</alarm>
</source>
</module>
</COMMAND>

In the alarm tag specify the alarm name; between the start and end of the tag specify the set-
tings of the alarm parameters.
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also getsetupmodule, getsetupsource, setsetupmodule

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-36
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

These commands are used to configure video streams.

Add stream
Define a video stream with its parameters.
Note: This command stores the stream parameters without any notice, even though a stream with this
STREAM_ID might already exist. Therefore carefully check in advance not to overwrite information you still
need.

You must use initstreams afterwards to initialize the streams.

Send <COMMAND ID="addstream" SERIAL="example">

<STREAM ID="video_stream3">
<CASTING>0</CASTING>
<ADDRESS>150.158.194.195</ADDRESS>
<PORT>6662</PORT>
<ENCODER>theencoder</ENCODER>
<ENCODERADDRESS>150.158.231.8</ENCODERADDRESS>
<ENCODERPORT>3231</ENCODERPORT>
<VIDEOPID>0</VIDEOPID>
</STREAM>
</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

</COMMANDRESULT>

See also Setstream, Deletestream, Initstreams

The following values can be used with the CASTING element:

0 unicast
1 multicast
2 broadcast

Set stream
Assign a specific stream on a certain module to a certain source. To each streaming video source a stream should
be specified.

Send <COMMAND ID="setstream" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module2">
<SOURCE ID="0">
<STREAM ID="stream1">
</STREAM>
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

</COMMANDRESULT>

See also Addstream, Deletestream, Initstreams

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-37
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Initstreams
After defining streams with the addstream command, the stream_config file has to be reinitialized to enable
iSTUDIO to use these streams. This is done with the initstream command. It is sufficient to call initstreams once
after adding multiple streams.

Send <COMMAND ID="INITSTREAMS" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

</COMMANDRESULT>

See also Addstream, Deletestream, Setstream

Deletestream
Delete the definition of a video stream.

You must use initstreams afterwards to make changes effective.

Send <COMMAND ID="deletestream" SERIAL="example">

<STREAM ID="video_stream5">
</STREAM>
</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

</COMMANDRESULT>

See also Addstream, Setstream, Initstreams

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-38
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.3.8 Alarm related commands

To administrate alarm related information to following commands are available:

Get list alarms

Get a list of all alarms that the system supports.

Send <COMMAND ID="getlistalarms" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

<ALARM ID="videoloss></ALARM>
...
<ALARM ID="audioloss></ALARM>
...
</COMMANDRESULT>

See also clearsourcealarm, getsourcealarm

Get alarms
Get a list of the configuration of all alarms.

Send <COMMAND ID="getalarms" SERIAL="example">

</COMMAND>

Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">

<LINE>...</LINE>
...
</COMMANDRESULT>

Between the line tags are the lines of the alarm configuration.
See also getlistalarms

Each alarm in the list starts with a line containing the word alarm and ends with a line containing the word
end. The table below shows the lines returned for a typical alarm:

lines - top to bottom explanation

<LINE>Alarm</LINE> start of the alarm section
<LINE>name = videoblack</LINE> name of the alarm
<LINE>params = 1</LINE> Parameter definition
0 no parameters
1 there are parameters
<LINE>param1id = 5001</LINE> for internal use
<LINE>param1min = 0</LINE> minimum value this alarm can have
<LINE>param1max = 255</LINE> maximum value this alarm can have
<LINE>param1def = 0</LINE> default value of this alarm
<LINE>param1div = 1</LINE> for internal use
<LINE>end</LINE> end of the alarm section

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-39
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.3.9 Object related commands

To change the properties of an object the following commands are available:

Adjust border
Adjust the border color of an object of the active layout.

Send <COMMAND ID="adjustborder" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<OBJECT ID="object1">green2</OBJECT>
<OBJECT ID="object2">yellow</OBJECT>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each object specify: module name, object name, border color.
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

Adjust stopwatch
Adjust the parameters of a stopwatch object of the active layout.

Send <COMMAND ID="adjuststopwatch" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<OBJECT ID="stopwatch1">
<START>12:00:00</START>
<STOP>14:30:15</STOP>
<COUNTDOWN>1</COUNTDOWN>
</OBJECT>
<OBJECT ID="stopwatch2">
<START>22:20:00</START>
<STOP>02:48:00</STOP>
<COUNTDOWN>0</COUNTDOWN>
</OBJECT>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each object specify: module name, object name, start time, stop time, countdown (0/1).
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

Adjust text
Adjust the text lines of a text object of the active layout.

Send <COMMAND ID="adjusttext" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<OBJECT ID="text1">
<LINE ID="0">Line1</LINE>
<LINE ID="8">Line9</LINE>
<LINE ID="15">Line16</LINE>
</OBJECT>
<OBJECT ID="text2">
<LINE ID="14">Text</LINE>
</OBJECT>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each object specify: module name, object name, line number (0-15), caption.
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-40
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Adjust UMD
Adjust the UMD captions of an object of the active layout.

Send <COMMAND ID="adjustumd" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<OBJECT ID="object1">
<LINE ID="0">Line1</LINE>
<LINE ID="1">Line2</LINE>
</OBJECT>
<OBJECT ID="object2">
<LINE ID="1">Text</LINE>
</OBJECT>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each object specify: module name, object name, line number (0-1), caption.
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

Adjust variable
Adjust the caption, the foreground color or the background color of a text variable.
Note: To send unicode characters, use &#<decimal unicode>; for instance for the unicode character 30A1,
use &#12499;

Send <COMMAND ID="adjustvariable" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<VARIABLE ID="10">
<CAPTION>Caption 10</CAPTION>
<FOREGROUND>red</FOREGROUND>
</VARIABLE>
<VARIABLE ID="25">
<BACKGROUND>green</BACKGROUND>
</VARIABLE>
<VARIABLE ID="111">
<CAPTION>Caption 111</CAPTION>
</VARIABLE>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each variable specify: module name, variable number (0-255), caption / foreground / back-
ground .
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-41
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.3.10 Tally related commands

To administrate tally related information the following commands are available:

Adjust tally
This command applies to software tallies only.
It serves to set the state or color of a software tally. State as well as color information can be transmitted with
the command at the same time. But whether the one or the other is applied, depends on the state of the state
entry of a tally object (section 11.3.4 File content) and the state checkbox on the Properties tab of a tally object
(section 5.6.4 Edit object…) respectively. If that state entry is true, then the tally state information will be adapted;
if that state entry is false, then the color of the tally will be adjusted accordingly.
Information, which was sent while it could not be applied due to the state of the state entry, will be applied as
soon as that state entry changes.

Send <COMMAND ID="adjusttally" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<TALLY ID="0"><STATE>1</STATE></TALLY>
<TALLY ID="80"><STATE>0</STATE></TALLY>
<TALLY ID="120"><COLOR>green</COLOR></TALLY>
<TALLY ID="200">
<STATE>1</STATE>
<COLOR>red</COLOR>
</TALLY>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each object specify: module name, tally number (0-255), state (0, 1) / color (color name
from rgb.cfg file)
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

Set source tally on object

Set the tally state of a hardware output tally or a software tally of the video object with the indicated name
(object ID).

Send <COMMAND ID="setsourcetallyonobject" SERIAL="example">

<MODULE ID="module1">
<OBJECT ID="myobjectname">
<TALLY id="0">
<STATE>0</STATE>
</TALLY>
</OBJECT>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>

For each object specify: module name, object name, tally number (0-2), tally state (0, 1 [, 2, 3])
Receive <COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>

Setsourcetallyonobject offers two additional tally states, which can only be set with this XML
command (not available via the iSTUDIO GUI).
These two additional states are only applicable for source tallies in software mode!
The two additional tally states can only be viewed, if the tally is displayed in a UMD! In a tally ob-
ject they do not become visible. In a tally object the tally states 2 and 3 look the same as the tally
state 1.
Corresponding to the two additional states the colors tally1state2, tally1state3 for tally 1 and
tally2state2, tally2state3 for tally 2 are available with the system colors.

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-42
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.3.11 Example

Send
<XML>
<PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<TRANSACTION SERIAL="updatemodules" MODE="0">
<COMMAND ID="loadlayoutandupdate" SERIAL="module1">
<MODULE ID="module1">
<LAYOUT ID="layout1"></LAYOUT>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>
<COMMAND ID="loadlayoutandupdate" SERIAL="module2">
<MODULE ID="module2">
<LAYOUT ID="layout2"></LAYOUT>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>
<COMMAND ID="loadlayoutandupdate" SERIAL="module3">
<MODULE ID="module3">
<LAYOUT ID="layout3"></LAYOUT>
</MODULE>
</COMMAND>
</TRANSACTION>
</PACKET>
</XML>

Receive
<XML>
<PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<TRANSACTIONRESULT SERIAL="updatemodules" ERROR="2">
<COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="module1" ERROR="1">
</COMMANDRESULT>
<COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="module2" ERROR="0">
</COMMANDRESULT>
<COMMANDRESULT SERIAL="module3" ERROR="1">
</COMMANDRESULT>
</TRANSACTIONRESULT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-43
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.4 Events

11.4.1 Definition
Events are messages that provide information about state changes on the HYDRA. They can come in at any time.
By default all events are turned off. This means that you need to activate the events that you are interested in.
You can also deactivate events once they are no longer useful. It is possible to open more than one event con-
nection at the same time, and to specify for each connection specific events.
Enabling events can be done with a packet that looks like this:
<XML>
<PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="eventname" SERIAL="example">
<ENABLE>
...
</ENABLE>
<DISABLE>
...
</DISABLE>
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

You will receive a confirmation, which contains the serial and an error flag that indicates if your changes have
been accepted:
<XML>
<PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENTRESULT SERIAL="example" ERROR="0">
</EVENTRESULT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

When an event is enabled and generated, you will receive a packet like this:
<XML>
<PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="eventname" ...>
...
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

11.4.2 Events – OverView

All available events of the open XML protocol are listed in the table below in alphabetic order together with a
short description. The related syntax can be found in the next section.

Event Description
alarmchanged an alarm of a source has changed
filechanged a file has been saved or deleted
freezechanged the freeze-state of a source has changed
modulechanged a module setup has been changed
layoutchanged the layout for a module has been updated
sourcechanged a source setup has been changed
tallychanged the tally state of a source has changed
wallchanged the configuration of the wall has changed
Table 11-2
Overview of events

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-44
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

11.4.3 Available events

Alarm changed
This event enables the monitoring of all or specific alarms. Please note that only the alarms that are enabled in
the source setup of a module are useful. The full list of available source related alarms can be found in the iStu-
dio user interface or can be requested with the getlistalarms command. A few examples of alarms are
videoloss, videoblack, videowhite and audioloss.
Furthermore the module related ntpsynchrolost alarm is available. It refers to the module not to a source and is
therefore addressed as source no. -1.
Within the <ALARMCHANGED> element the following elements might be:
• <ENABLEALLMODULE> element
to enable all alarms of a module. Specify module
• <DISABLEALLMODULE> element
to disable all alarms of a module. Specify module
• <ENABLEALLSOURCE> element
to enable all alarms of a source. Specify module and source.
• <DISABLEALLSOURCE> element
to disable all alarms of a source. Specify module and source.
• <ENABLE> element
to enable a specific alarm. Specify module, source and alarmtype.

Enable / <XML>
disable <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="alarmchanged" SERIAL="example">
<ENABLEALLMODULE>
<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE> Enable all alarms for this module
</ENABLEALLMODULE>
<DISABLEALLMODULE>
<MODULE ID="module2"></MODULE> Disable all alarms for this module
<MODULE ID="module3"></MODULE>
</DISABLEALLMODULE>
<ENABLEALLSOURCE>
<MODULE ID="module4">
<SOURCE ID="29"></SOURCE> Enable all alarms on this source
<SOURCE ID="19"></SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="9"></SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</ENABLEALLSOURCE>
<DISABLEALLSOURCE>
<MODULE ID="module5">
<SOURCE ID="11"></SOURCE> Disable all alarms for this source
</MODULE>
</DISABLEALLSOURCE>
<ENABLE>
<MODULE ID="module3">
<SOURCE ID="11">
<ALARM ID="videoblack"></ALARM> Enable this alarm for this source
<ALARM ID="videowhite"></ALARM>
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</ENABLE>
<DISABLE>
<MODULE ID="module2">
<SOURCE ID="21">
<ALARM ID="videoloss"></ALARM> Disable this alarm for this source
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</DISABLE>
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-45
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Incoming <XML>
event <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="alarmchanged" CHANGE="active"> active, solved, cleared
<MODULE ID="module3">
<SOURCE ID="17">
<ALARM ID="videoloss">
<ACTIVE>1</ACTIVE>
<CLEARED>0</CLEARED>
<STARTED>09:19:32</STARTED>
<STARTEDDATE>29/9/2005</STARTEDDATE>
</ALARM>
</SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="-1">
<ALARM ID="ntpsynchrolost">
<ACTIVE>1</ACTIVE>
<CLEARED>0</CLEARED>
<STARTED>10:58:15</STARTED>
<STOPPED>10:58:15</STOPPED>
<STARTEDDATE>29/9/2005</STARTEDDATE>
<STOPPEDDATE>29/9/2005</STOPPEDDATE>
<FLAGS>1</FLAGS>
</ALARM>
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</EVENT>
<EVENT ID="alarmchanged" CHANGE="cleared">
<MODULE ID="module1">
<SOURCE ID="7">
<ALARM ID="audioloss">
<ACTIVE>0</ACTIVE>
<CLEARED>1</CLEARED>
<STARTED>09:19:33</STARTED>
<STOPPED>09:19:34</STOPPED>
<STARTEDDATE>29/9/2005</STARTEDDATE>
<STOPPEDDATE>29/9/2005</STOPPEDDATE>
</ALARM>
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

See also getlistalarms, getmodulestate, getsourcealarm

File changed
This event reports that a file has been saved or deleted on the wall.

Enable / <XML>
disable <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="filechanged" SERIAL="example">
<ENABLE></ENABLE> enable file events
<DISABLE></DISABLE> disable file events
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

Incoming <XML>
event <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="filechanged"></EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

See also deletefile, getlistfiles, savefile

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-46
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Freeze changed
This event reports that a source has been frozen or unfrozen on a module of the wall.

Enable / <XML>
disable <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="freezechanged" SERIAL="example">
<ENABLE>
<MODULE ID="module1">
<SOURCE ID="1"></SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="2"></SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</ENABLE>
<DISABLE>
<MODULE ID="module2">
<SOURCE ID="12"></SOURCE>
</MODULE>
<MODULE ID="module3">
<SOURCE ID="21"></SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</DISABLE>
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

Incoming <XML>
event <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="freezechanged">
<MODULE ID="module1">
<SOURCE ID="2"></SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

See also getmodulestate, getsourcefreeze, setsourcefreeze

Layout changed
This event reports that a layout has been updated on a module of the wall.

Enable / <XML>
disable <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="layoutchanged" SERIAL="example">
<ENABLE>
<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
<MODULE ID="module3"></MODULE>
</ENABLE>
<DISABLE>
<MODULE ID="module2"></MODULE>
</DISABLE>
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

Incoming <XML>
event <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="layoutchanged">
<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

See also getlayout, loadlayoutandupdate, updatelayout

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-47
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Module changed
This event reports that the module setup has changed of a module of the wall.

Enable / <XML>
disable <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="modulechanged" SERIAL="example">
<ENABLE>
<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
</ENABLE>
<DISABLE>
<MODULE ID="module2"></MODULE>
<MODULE ID="module3"></MODULE>
</DISABLE>
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

Incoming <XML>
event <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="modulechanged">
<MODULE ID="module1"></MODULE>
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

See also getsetupmodule, setsetupmodule

Source changed
This event reports that the setup of a source of a module of the wall has changed.
Note: Currently use with source 0. All sources are changed in parallel so a change of source 0 means a change of
all sources. Other sources can be added, but will have no effect.

Enable / <XML>
disable <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="sourcechanged" SERIAL="example">
<ENABLE>
<MODULE ID="module1">
<SOURCE ID="0"></SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="10"></SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="20"></SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</ENABLE>
<DISABLE>
<MODULE ID="module2">
<SOURCE ID="0"></SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</DISABLE>
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

Incoming <XML>
event <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="sourcechanged">
<MODULE ID="module1">
<SOURCE ID="0"></SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

See also getsetupsource, setsetupsource

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-48
 11. Appendix A - Hydra Open Protocol

Tally changed
This event reports that the tally state of a source of a module of the wall has changed.

Enable / <XML>
disable <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="tallychanged" SERIAL="example">
<ENABLE>
<MODULE ID="module1">
<SOURCE ID="0"></SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="10"></SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</ENABLE>
<DISABLE>
<MODULE ID="module1">
<SOURCE ID="20"></SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</DISABLE>
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

Incoming <XML>
event <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="tallychanged">
<MODULE ID="module1">
<SOURCE ID="0">
<TALLY ID="2">1</TALLY> tally 2 of source 0 is now on
</SOURCE>
<SOURCE ID="10">
<TALLY ID="0">0</TALLY> tally 0 of source 10 is now off
</SOURCE>
</MODULE>
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

See also getmodulestate, getsourcetally, setsourcetally

Wall changed
This event reports that the configuration of the wall has changed: modules are added or removed.

Enable / <XML>
disable <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="wallchanged" SERIAL="example">
<ENABLE></ENABLE> enable wall events
<DISABLE></DISABLE> disable wall events
</EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

Incoming <XML>
event <PACKET MODULE="HYDRA" VERSION="1.0">
<EVENT ID="wallchanged"></EVENT>
</PACKET>
</XML>

See also getwall, haltmodule, rebootmodule

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 11-49
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

12 Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

Special functionality that is not applicable via the iSTUDIO software can be used by means of the HYDRA scripting
language. But the XML open protocol provides the whole functionality of the HYDRA scripting language in a pow-
erful and user-friendly way and will be extended and supported further on. Therefore we recommend strictly to
use the XML open protocol instead of the HYDRA scripting language, please refer to section 11 Appendix A - Hydra
Open Protocol.

The Hydra scripting language is part of the iStudio user's manual just for the reason of
compatibility and completeness. There is no guarantee that the Hydra scripting language
will be supported in future iStudio releases!

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-1
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

12.1 How to use scripts without the user interface

• only one user script can be executed at a time on each module, this means that your script will have to wait
until a running script terminates before it will be executed (the script server allows more than 10 pending
connections).
• create a client TCP socket with the address of the HYDRA module (e.g. 150.158.196.151) and with port 6767
and open the socket, if the connection succeeds, you can send your script line by line as ASCII text, for in-
stance:
begin\n
module this\n
output this\n
end\n
• wait for the script to execute, when the script contains a never-ending loop you will have to stop it by send-
ing: stop\n or by simply closing the socket if you are not interested in output
• messages send with the message command can be received on the fly while the script is executing, mes-
sages are received in the following format : >message\n , e.g. >This is a script message\n.
• after the script is executed/stopped you will receive the following
begin\n
OK\n
script output (zero or more lines depending on the output commands in
script, all lines start with >)
end\n
• you can also receive an error when an unrecognized command is found or the script is interrupted/stopped,
the error contains the line where the problem was found or the script was stopped:
begin\n
ERROR\n
error line\n
script output
end\n
• close the socket, you can now repeat this procedure if necessary

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-2
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

12.1.1 Java script code example

/* Java script code example:
Returns the names of the first eight sources of the module */
import java.io.*;
import java.net.*;

public class scriptTest

{
public static void main(String args[])
{
try
{
/* Connect to script server */
Socket socket=new Socket("150.158.196.151",6767);
InputStream istream=socket.getInputStream();
OutputStream ostream=socket.getOutputStream()
InputStreamReader input=newInputStreamReader(istream);
OutputStreamWriter output=new OutputStreamWriter(ostream);
BufferedReader reader=new BufferedReader(input);
BufferedWriter writer=new BufferedWriter(output);

/* Send the script */

writer.write("begin\n");
writer.write("module this\n");
writer.write("getsetup this\n");
writer.write("expr set count 0\n");
writer.write(":loop\n");
writer.write("source count\n");
writer.write("getsource \"name\" name\n");
writer.write("output name\n");
writer.write("expr + count count 1\n");
writer.write("expr < test count 8\n");
writer.write("goto test loop\n");
writer.write("end\n");
writer.flush();

/* Read the result */

String buf;
buf=reader.readLine(); /* Should be "begin" */
buf=reader.readLine(); /* Should be "OK" */

/* Read names until "end" */

while ((buf=reader.readLine())!=null&&buf.compareTo("end")!=0)
{
buf=buf.substring(1); /* remove > */
System.out.println(buf);
}

/* Close the connection */

socket.close();
}
catch (Exception e)
{
System.out.println("Exception!");
}
}
}

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-3
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

12.2 Definition of script syntax

Commenting lines in your script can be done with a semicolon ; . For instance:
; Put the name of module in variable this
module this
Labels can be defined with a : followed by the name of the label, e.g. :label. Each label can be used only once
(unique position in script).
Variables do not have to be declared. All variables are stored as strings but you can use the content of a variable
for arithmetic operations or as a boolean. Do not use more variables than necessary (performance). Variable
names can contain letters, digits and the underscore: e.g. counter_1.
String constants have to be defined this way: ”constant”, e.g. ”hydra”.
Number constants consist of an optional minus sign and digits. Only integer constants are supported (with a 32
bit range). Booleans are also defined as number constants: zero means false and not zero means true.
Instructions/commands have the following structure :
command [subcommand] par1 par2 ... parN
The first parameter is usually the result variable if a result is returned.
The well-known if / then / else, case / switch, for, while or repeat constructs are not avail-
able. All these constructs can be however replaced by the usage of labels and conditional jumps/gotos. Pro-
cedures and functions are also not available in the traditional way. Arrays are not available, but there are lists
instead.

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-4
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

12.2.1 Examples of replacements

Example of replacing for (or while or repeat):

C code
for (counter=0;counter<8;counter++) sum+=counter;

Script code
expr set counter 0
:for
expr >= test counter 8
goto test done
expr + sum sum counter
expr + counter counter 1
goto 1 for
:done

Example of replacing if / then / else:

C code
if (counter == 8) counter = 0; else counter++;

Script code
expr = test counter 8
goto test equal
:notequal
expr + counter counter 1
goto 1 endif
:equal
expr set counter 0
:endif

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-5
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

Example of replacing switch / case:

C code
switch (number)
{
case 0: result = 10;
break;
case 3: break;
default: result = -1;
}

Script code
:case0
expr <> test number 0
goto test case3
expr set result 10
goto 1 done
:case3
expr <> test number 3 OR expr = test number 3
goto test default goto test done
goto 1 done
:default
expr set result -1
:done

Example of replacing arrays:

C code
int array[5];
int value;
for (counter=0;counter<5;counter++)
array[counter]=counter;
value=array[3];

Script code
list init array
expr set counter 0
:for
list + array array counter
expr + counter counter 1
expr < test counter 5
goto test for
list get value 3

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-6
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

Example of using pointers / references:

C code
int a=5; /* a will now contain 5 */
int* b=&a;
*b=10; /* a will now contain 10 */

Script code
expr set a 5 ; a will now contain 5
expr ptr b "a"
expr set b 10 ; a will now contain 10

Example of using subroutines to replace functions / procedures:

:main
expr set squareparam 5
expr ptr squareresult "answer"
gosub 1 square
output answer
return
; Calculate square
:square
expr * squareresult squareparam squareparam
return

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-7
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

12.2.2 Description of script commands

expr
expr operation result [par1] [par2]
The following operations are available:

Operation Description
set put par1 in result
+ put par1 + par2 in result
- put par1 – par2 in result
* put par1 x par2 in result
/ put par1 / par2 in result
mod put remainder of par1 / par2 in result
and put par1 and par2 (booleans) in result (boolean)
or put par1 or par2 (booleans) in result (boolean)
not put not par1 (boolean) in result (boolean)
random put random value between 0 and par1 in result
= put par1 = par2 in result (boolean)
<> put par1 <> par2 in result (boolean)
< put par1 < par2 in result (boolean)
<= put par1 <= par2 in result (boolean)
> put par1 > par2 in result (boolean)
>= put par1 >= par2 in result (boolean)
ptr put a reference/pointer to par1 in result (now you can use variable result to reference
variable par1), e.g. expr ptr var1p ”var1” (quotes are necessary !) now you can
also use var1p to address var1
Table 12-1
Operations of expr command

string
string operation result [par1] [par2] [par3]
The following operations are available:

Operation Description
set put string par1 in string result
+ put strings par1 + par2 in string result (concat)
cut put substring of par1 with start position par2 (0 - length minus one) and end position
par3 (0 - length minus one) in string result
length put length of string par1 in result
=, <>, <, <=, >, >= same purpose as with expr, but now for strings instead of numbers
boolean put true or false in result depending of the boolean in par1 (to get a boolean result
from a boolean string par1 do the following:
string = result par1 “true” or
string <> result par1 “false” )
Table 12-2
Operations of string command

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-8
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

list
list operation result [par1] [par2]
The following operations are available:

Operation Description
init create a new list in result
+ concat lists in par1 and par2 in list result, concat list in par1 with element par2 in list
result
get get element par2 (index from 0 to number of elements minus one) of list in par1 in
result
total get total number of elements in list par1 in result
Table 12-3
Operations of list command

goto
goto condition label
Jump to label if boolean condition is true.

gosub
gosub condition label
Jump to (subroutine) label if boolean condition is true.

return
return
Return from a gosub or stop script if used in main.

sleep
sleep seconds:
Wait a number of seconds.

date
date day month year
Get date in day, month and year (4 digits).

time
time hour min sec
Get time in hour, min and sec.

timer
timer seconds
Get time in seconds (can be used to create sleep).

output
output string
Add string to script output (after execution).

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-9
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

message
message string
Send script message string (while execution).

halt
halt module
Halt module with name module.

reboot
reboot module
Reboot module with name module.

module
module name
Get the name of the module running this script.

wall
wall list
Get a list (see list command) with all the modules in this wall.

load
load layout
Load stored layout (e.g. brochure) into work layout.

empty
empty
Make work layout empty.

active
active module
Get active layout on module in work layout.

update
update module
Update work layout to module.

total
total total
Get total number of objects in work layout.

select
select number
Select object (0 - total minus one) in work layout, necessary for some of the following commands.

selectname
selectname name
Select the first object with this name in work layout.

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-10
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

type
type
Get type of currently selected object, the possible types are: General, Object, Video, Audio, Logo, Clock, Timer,
Viewer and Application.

set
set attribute value
Set attribute of selected object to value in work layout, see section 12.2.4 Description of object attributes (Layouts).

get
get attribute value
Get attribute of selected object in work layout, see section 12.2.4 Description of object attributes (Layouts).

front
front
Put currently selected object in work layout to the front.

back
back
Put currently selected object in work layout to the back.

getsetup
getsetup module
Get the source setup for module to work setup.

setsetup
setsetup module
Setup the source setup of module with the work setup .

source
source source (or selectsource)
Select work source (0-29).

setsource
setsource attribute value
Set attribute of work source to value in work setup, see section 12.2.3 Description of source attributes (sources.cfg).

getsource
getsource attribute value
Get attribute of work source in work setup, see source attributes for the source attribute names.

setsourcename
setsourcename module source name
Set name of source for module.

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-11
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

settally
settally module source tally state
Set tally (0-2) of source (0-29) of module to state (boolean). This is only available for software tallies.

state
state module
Get current state of module (tallies and errors), do this before you use the tally and error commands.

tally
tally value tally (or gettally)
Get tally (0-2) for work source (hardware or software according to configuration of each source).

error
error error (or geterror)
Get error state (boolean) for work source (when one of the enabled alarms of a source is active error will be
true).

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-12
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

12.2.3 Description of source attributes (sources.cfg)

Attribute Description
name name of source (e.g. “Video1”)
freeze boolean with freeze state (all booleans are a “true” or “false” string, not a
value 0 or not 0 !)
standard source standard (e.g. PALAuto, NTSC, SECAM, PALM)
type source type (0: default, 1: SVHS)
deinterlace boolean with deinterlace state
black, bright, contrast, video setup parameters
satsinhue, satcoshue, horstart,
horwidth, evenstart, oddstart,
verwidth
embedded embedded audio (boolean)
group group for embedded audio (0-3)
channel0 … channel15 channel number for this audio position (-1: no channel, 0-3 available audio
sources for embedded audio, 0-111 available audio sources for non em-
bedded audio)
modetally0 … modetally2 tally mode, 0: hardware or 1: software
alarmalarmname alarm configuration for alarm alarmname
alarmalarmnameparamn extra parameter n (1-9) for alarm alarmname (for instance level for
videoblack, videowhite and videofreeze alarms)
Table 12-4
Source attributes

alarmname can be for instance:

• videoloss
• videofreeze, videoblack, videowhite
• videotrs, videolock, videohorlock
• videolumaoverflow, videochromaoverflow
• audioloss, audiolock
• tally1, tally2, tally3
See source alarms in section 7.1.3 Video errors and 7.1.1 Audio errors.
The alarm is specified by a parameter containing three numbers, e.g. 15 0 5. The first number contains the alarm
flags, the second number is the number of seconds before the alarm is activated and the third number is the
number of seconds before alarm is auto cleared.
The alarm bit flags are:

Bit flag Alarm

1 enabled
2 auto clear
4 show in alarm list (GUI)
8 show in objects (blinking border)
16 send email message
32 send SNMP trap
64 log alarm in log file
Table 12-5
Bit flags for alarms

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-13
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

12.2.4 Description of object attributes (Layouts)

General
General layout properties:

Attribute Description
resx resolution width
resy resolution height
backcolor background color (e.g. black, blue2, red3, white, yellow)
bitmap use background bitmap (boolean, “true” or “false”)
bitmapstyle center, tile, scale
bitmapname filename of bitmap
Table 12-6
General object attributes

Object
Empty object (also present in the following objects!):

Attribute Description
name name of object (e.g. “Video1”)
left x position of object (0 – (horizontal resolution of the display - width))
top y position of object (0 – (vertical resolution of the display- height))
width width of object (0 – horizontal resolution of the display)
height height of object (0 – vertical resolution of the display)
aspect aspect ratio of object (none, 4/3 or 16/9)
transparent transparent on video objects (boolean)
visible visible (boolean)
borderon border on (boolean)
borderwidth width of border (1-25)
bordercolor color of border
borderstyle plain or 3D
umdon UMD visible (boolean)
umdusetext use source name (false) or umdtext line one (true)
umdusetext2 two (true) or one (false) line UMD
umdtext text for UMD line one
umdtext2 text for UMD line two
umdfont font for UMD (e.g. 5x7, 8x13, 12x24)
umdposition UMD text position (top left, top center, top right, bottom left, bottom center, bottom
right)
umdinside UMD inside (boolean)
umdsplitted splitted 2 lines UMD enabled (boolean)
umdseparator separator line enabled (boolean)
umdsepcolor separator line color of UMD
umdforecolor foreground color of UMD
umdbackcolor background color of UMD
Table 12-7
Empty object attributes

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-14
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

Video
Video object specific:

Attribute Description
source source number (0-29)
translevel level of transparency (0, 50 or 100)
scramble enable scrambling (boolean)
scramblelevel level of scrambling (0,10,…,90,100)
tallyon show tallies (boolean)
tallypos UMD or border
tallystyle red - red, green - green, red - green, green – red
audioon show audio bars (boolean)
audioscale BBC PPM, Nordic, VU, DIN
audioplain plain bars (true) or with scales (false)
barwidth width of audio bars (1-25)
erroron show alarms in this object (boolean)
errorcolor second color when blinking
Table 12-8
Video object attributes

Audio
Audio object specific:

Attribute Description
audiosource audio source (0-29)
backcolor background color
barwidth width of audio bars (1-25)
audioscale BBC PPM, Nordic, VU, DIN
audioplain plain bars (true) or with scales (false)
Table 12-9
Audio object attributes

Logo
Logo object specific:

Attribute Description
bitmap filename of bitmap
animated animation (boolean)
Table 12-10
Logo object attributes

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-15
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

Clock
Clock object specific:

Attribute Description
digital digital (true) or analog clock (false)
twelve 12 hours (true) or 24 hours (false) digital clock
offseth offset for hours (e.g. -8 or 5)
backcolor background color
forecolor foreground color
Table 12-11
Clock object attributes

Timer
Timer object specific:

Attribute Description
backcolor background color
forecolor foreground color
today destination time is today (true) or tomorrow (false)
stopH hours of destination time
stopM minutes of destination time
stopS seconds of destination time
Table 12-12
Timer object attributes

Viewer
Viewer object specific:

Attribute Description
address address of machine to view
scaling apply scaling (boolean)
filtering apply filtering (boolean)
blackwhite apply black and white filtering (boolean)
Table 12-13
Viewer object attributes

Application
Application object specific:

Attribute Description
command application command line (e.g. oclock -bg blue -fg white)
Table 12-14
Application object attributes

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-16
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

12.3 Some example scripts

12.3.1 Aspect script

Set aspect ratio of video windows according to tally status
module module

:loop
active module
state module
total total
expr set c 0
expr set ok 1

:check
select c
type type
string <> test type "Video"
goto test cont

get "source" source

get "width" width
get "aspect" aspect

source source
tally test 0
goto test 16by9
:4by3
string set newaspect "4/3"
expr * width width 3
expr / width width 4
goto 1 cont2
:16by9
string set newaspect "16/9"
expr * width width 9
expr / width width 16
:cont2
set "height" width

string = test aspect newaspect

goto test cont

set "aspect" newaspect

expr set ok 0

:cont
expr + c c 1
expr < test c total
goto test check

goto ok noupdate
update module

:noupdate
sleep 3
goto 1 loop

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-17
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

12.3.2 Fullscreen script

Show first source without error fullscreen
module this
load "full"

:loop
state this
expr set source 0

:loop2
source source
error test
expr = test test 0
goto test cont
expr + source source 1
expr < test source 30
goto test loop2

:cont
select 1
set "source" source
set "umdtext" source
update this
sleep 1
goto 1 loop

12.3.3 List script

Demonstrates some list operations
list init list
list + list list "hello"
list + list list "world"
output list
list init list2
list + list2 list2 "A"
list + list2 list2 "B"
list + list2 list2 "C"
output list2
list + list list list2
output list

list total c list

output c
:loop
expr - c c 1
list get res list c
message res
expr > test c 0
goto test loop

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-18
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

12.3.4 Update script

Scenario written with a script
list init l
list + l l "2x2"
list + l l "4x4"
list + l l "audio"
list + l l "audio2"
list + l l "audio3"
list + l l "audio4"
list + l l "background"
list + l l "brochure"
list + l l "clock"
list + l l "clock2"
list + l l "clock3"
list + l l "clock4"
list + l l "clock5"
list + 1 1 "pictinpict"
list + l l "scramble"
list + 1 1 "video"
list + 1 1 "video2"

list total tot l

expr set c 0
expr set i 0
module module
message "start"

:show
list get name l c
expr + c c 1
expr < test c tot
goto test cont
expr set c 0
expr + i i 1
message i

:cont
load name
update module
sleep 15
goto 1 show

12.3.5 Window script

Changing window position
load "windowtest"
module module

expr set dirx -1

expr set diry -1
gosub 1 randx
gosub 1 randy

select 1
expr set resx 1023
get "width" width
expr - resx resx width
expr set resy 767
get "height" height
expr - resy resy height

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-19
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

:loop
select 1

get "left" left

expr + left left dirx
expr >= test left 0
goto test x1cont
gosub 1 randx
expr set left 0
goto 1 x2cont
:x1cont
expr <= test left resx
goto test x2cont
gosub 1 randx
expr set left resx
:x2cont
set "left" left

get "top" top

expr + top top diry
expr >= test top 0
goto test y1cont
gosub 1 randy
expr set top 0
goto 1 y2cont
:y1cont
expr <= test top resy
goto test y2cont
gosub 1 randy
expr set top resy
:y2cont
set "top" top

update module
expr set c 0
:wait
expr + c c 1
expr < test c 5000
goto test wait
goto 1 loop

:randx
expr random r 5
expr + r r 1
expr < test dirx 0
goto test randxc
expr - dirx 0 r
return
:randxc
expr set dirx r
return

:randy
expr random r 5
expr + r r 1
expr < test diry 0
goto test randyc
expr - diry 0 r
return
:randyc
expr set diry r
return

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-20
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

12.3.6 UMD script

Adjusting layout UMDs
module this
expr set count 0
expr set count2 0
string set line "-"

:loop
active this
total t

expr set c 1
:loop2
expr >= test c t
goto test cont
select c
set "umdtext" count
set "umdtext2" line
expr + c c 1
goto 1 loop2

:cont
expr + count count 1
expr + count2 count2 count
string + line line "-"
string length len line
expr <= test len 5
goto test cont2
string set line "-"

:cont2
update this
sleep 1
goto 1 loop

12.3.7 Tally script

Using tallies
string set modulename "Module"
settally modulename 0 0 1
settally modulename 0 1 0
settally modulename 0 2 1

state modulename
source 0
tally t1 0
tally t2 1
tally t3 2
error e

output t1
output t2
output t3
output e

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-21
 12. Appendix B – Hydra scripting language definition v1.0

12.3.8 Source script

Changing source names
; Set all source names
getsetup "Module"
expr set count 0

:loop
source count
expr + count count 1
string set name "Source"
string + name name count
setsource "name" name
expr < test count 30
goto test loop

setsetup "Module"

12.3.9 String script

Demonstrates some string operations
string set text "hello world!"
output text

string cut hello text 0 4

string cut world text 6 10

string set new world

string + new new " "
string + new new hello
string + new new "."
string length len new
string + new new " ("
string + new new len
string + new new ")"
output new

string = bool len 12

string boolean sbool bool
string = bool2 sbool "true"
string set text bool
string + text text ","
string + text text sbool
string + text text ","
string + text text bool2
output text

__________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 12-22
 13. Index

13 Index
13.1 List of tables
Table 3-1 System requirements for the control computer ........................................................................................ 3-2
Table 3-2 Factory set passwords................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Table 3-3 Factory set network settings ...................................................................................................................... 3-6
Table 5-1 Toolbar buttons and shortcut keys ............................................................................................................. 5-4
Table 5-2 Options of the Setup user mode dialog box ............................................................................................ 5-12
Table 5-3 Available colors in iSTUDIO ......................................................................................................................... 5-12
Table 5-4 Resolution settings of projection modules............................................................................................... 5-33
Table 5-5 Settings for the aspect ratio list................................................................................................................ 5-34
Table 5-6 Genlock ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-34
Table 5-7 Dependencies of output settings, Genlock and SDI resync ..................................................................... 5-38
Table 5-8 Alternately cabling .................................................................................................................................... 5-38
Table 5-9 Sequential cabling ..................................................................................................................................... 5-38
Table 5-10 Encoder dependant parameter values ................................................................................................... 5-47
Table 5-11 Settings of video and RGB sources......................................................................................................... 5-51
Table 5-12 Color codes of object types..................................................................................................................... 5-70
Table 5-13 Options on the video properties tabs..................................................................................................... 5-75
Table 5-14 Options on the audio properties tabs..................................................................................................... 5-77
Table 6-1 Entries of the shortcut menu available via the tree .................................................................................. 6-3
Table 6-2 Items of the statebar .................................................................................................................................. 6-6
Table 7-1 Audio errors processed by HYDRA ................................................................................................................ 7-2
Table 7-2 Synchronization errors processed by HYDRA ............................................................................................... 7-2
Table 7-3 Video errors processed by HYDRA ................................................................................................................ 7-3
Table 7-4 Hardware and software errors processed by HYDRA .................................................................................. 7-7
Table 9-1 Order codes.................................................................................................................................................. 9-2
Table 11-1 Overview of commands.......................................................................................................................... 11-8
Table 11-2 Overview of events ............................................................................................................................... 11-44
Table 12-1 Operations of expr command ................................................................................................................. 12-8
Table 12-2 Operations of string command ............................................................................................................... 12-8
Table 12-3 Operations of list command.................................................................................................................... 12-9
Table 12-4 Source attributes ................................................................................................................................... 12-13
Table 12-5 Bit flags for alarms ................................................................................................................................ 12-13
Table 12-6 General object attributes ...................................................................................................................... 12-14
Table 12-7 Empty object attributes......................................................................................................................... 12-14
Table 12-8 Video object attributes.......................................................................................................................... 12-15
Table 12-9 Audio object attributes.......................................................................................................................... 12-15
Table 12-10 Logo object attributes ......................................................................................................................... 12-15
Table 12-11 Clock object attributes......................................................................................................................... 12-16
Table 12-12 Timer object attributes........................................................................................................................ 12-16

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 13-1
 13. Index

Table 12-13 Viewer object attributes ..................................................................................................................... 12-16

Table 12-14 Application object attributes............................................................................................................... 12-16

13.2 List of figures

Figure 2-1 Setup with 3 HYDRAS ................................................................................................................................... 2-2

Figure 3-1 HYDRA startup screen .................................................................................................................................. 3-3
Figure 3-2 Connecting to HYDRA using a web-browser............................................................................................... 3-3
Figure 3-3 iSTUDIO select mode .................................................................................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3-4 Security warning – Java applet .................................................................................................................. 3-4
Figure 3-5 Login window............................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Figure 5-1 Wall menu (left), grid toolbar (top right) and context menus (bottom right): Modules, Wall layouts and
Wall layout ........................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
Figure 5-2 Create wall layout dialog box.................................................................................................................... 5-5
Figure 5-3 Save wall layout dialog box ...................................................................................................................... 5-6
Figure 5-4 Wall alarm list toggled on (left) and off (right) ....................................................................................... 5-7
Figure 5-5 List of wall alarms...................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Figure 5-6 Wall scenario dialog box............................................................................................................................ 5-8
Figure 5-7 Wall script dialog box ................................................................................................................................ 5-9
Figure 5-8 Setup password dialog box ..................................................................................................................... 5-11
Figure 5-9 Setup user mode dialog box ................................................................................................................... 5-11
Figure 5-10 Setup colors dialog box ......................................................................................................................... 5-12
Figure 5-11 Setup time dialog................................................................................................................................... 5-13
Figure 5-12 Setup time dialog – NTP configuration (detail) and Add NTP server dialog ....................................... 5-14
Figure 5-13 Setup time dialog – NTP Date configuration (detail) ........................................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-14 Setup time dialog – LTC/VITC configuration (detail) ............................................................................ 5-16
Figure 5-15 Setup time dialog – manual configuration ........................................................................................... 5-17
Figure 5-16 Setup time dialog – Module configuration ........................................................................................... 5-18
Figure 5-17 Setup time dialog – Timezone setup configuration (left) and Select a timezone dialog (right) ....... 5-19
Figure 5-18 Setup timings dialog.............................................................................................................................. 5-20
Figure 5-19 Setup hardware dialog .......................................................................................................................... 5-21
Figure 5-20 Audio setup dialog................................................................................................................................. 5-22
Figure 5-21 Setup NGM-164 dialog .......................................................................................................................... 5-23
Figure 5-22 Configure scales dialog.......................................................................................................................... 5-24
Figure 5-23 Layout toolbar, Module menu and shortcut menus............................................................................. 5-25
Figure 5-24 Module status dialog ............................................................................................................................. 5-28
Figure 5-25 Module properties dialog – General tab ............................................................................................... 5-30
Figure 5-26 Module properties dialog – Screen tab ................................................................................................. 5-31
Figure 5-27 Module properties dialog – Network tab (left) and Add SNMP manager (right) ............................... 5-35
Figure 5-28 Module properties dialog – Boards tab –Streaming video card (left) and NG Streaming video card
(right) ................................................................................................................................................................. 5-36

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 13-2
 13. Index

Figure 5-29 Module properties dialog – Boards tab – DVI-DVI output card with scaling (left) and DVI video output
card (right) ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-37
Figure 5-30 Module properties dialog – Sources tab................................................................................................ 5-39
Figure 5-31 Module properties dialog – Startup tab (left) and Alarm tab (right) .................................................. 5-41
Figure 5-32 Module properties dialog – Protocols tab ............................................................................................. 5-42
Figure 5-33 Setup encoders dialog ........................................................................................................................... 5-43
Figure 5-34 Setup stream dialog............................................................................................................................... 5-48
Figure 5-35 Source properties dialog – Video tab – Examples of quad analog video source (left) and RGB source
(right) ................................................................................................................................................................. 5-49
Figure 5-36 Crop settings dialog ............................................................................................................................... 5-51
Figure 5-37 Source properties dialog – Audio tab .................................................................................................... 5-52
Figure 5-38 Source properties dialog – Alarm tab.................................................................................................... 5-55
Figure 5-39 Source properties dialog – Define intervals dialog............................................................................... 5-56
Figure 5-40 Source properties dialog – Tally tab ...................................................................................................... 5-57
Figure 5-41 Source properties dialog – VBI tab and Copy tab ................................................................................. 5-58
Figure 5-42 Layout toolbar, menu and shortcut menu ............................................................................................ 5-59
Figure 5-43 Load layout dialog ................................................................................................................................. 5-59
Figure 5-44 Layout properties – dialog box .............................................................................................................. 5-60
Figure 5-45 Selection toolbar, Edit selection toolbar and Group menu .................................................................. 5-61
Figure 5-46 Load objects dialog box......................................................................................................................... 5-63
Figure 5-47 Horizontal alignment of a selection...................................................................................................... 5-64
Figure 5-48 Vertical alignment of a selection .......................................................................................................... 5-65
Figure 5-49 Horizontal and vertical alignment of a selection ................................................................................. 5-65
Figure 5-50 Layout toolbar, Edit object toolbar, Object toolbar, Object menu and shortcut menu....................... 5-66
Figure 5-51 Load object dialog box .......................................................................................................................... 5-68
Figure 5-52 Edit object dialog box – Type................................................................................................................. 5-69
Figure 5-53 Edit object dialog box – Border ............................................................................................................. 5-71
Figure 5-54 Edit object dialog box – Parent.............................................................................................................. 5-72
Figure 5-55 Edit object dialog box – Properties tabs of video ................................................................................. 5-76
Figure 5-56 Edit object dialog box – Properties tabs of audio ................................................................................. 5-78
Figure 5-57 Edit object dialog box – Properties of text (left) and Properties of UMD (right) ................................ 5-79
Figure 5-58 Edit object dialog box –Properties of tally; upper part (left) and lower part (right) .......................... 5-80
Figure 5-59 Edit object dialog box – Properties of logo (left) and Properties of clock (right) ............................... 5-81
Figure 5-60 Edit object dialog box – Properties of timer (left) and Properties of stopwatch (right) .................... 5-82
Figure 5-61 Edit object dialog box – Properties of alarm (left) and Properties of viewer (right) ......................... 5-83
Figure 5-62 Edit object dialog box – Properties of application ................................................................................ 5-84
Figure 5-63 Edit object dialog box – UMD................................................................................................................. 5-85
Figure 5-64 Viewer window on the operator PC...................................................................................................... 5-88
Figure 5-65 Grid toolbar and Grid menu................................................................................................................... 5-89
Figure 5-66 Toggle button – Fixed movement ......................................................................................................... 5-89
Figure 5-67 Toggle button – Lock objects ................................................................................................................. 5-90
Figure 5-68 Transparent and non-transparent objects in the work area ................................................................ 5-90
Figure 5-69 Work and display area with maintained aspect ratio (left) and with the whole area used (right).. 5-91

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 13-3
 13. Index

Figure 5-70 Work area with default setting (left) and with Use vertical enabled (right) .................................... 5-91
Figure 5-71 4 by 3 aspect ratio within XGA resolution (left) and 16 by 9 aspect ratio within XGA resolution (right)
............................................................................................................................................................................ 5-92
Figure 5-72 Language menu ..................................................................................................................................... 5-94
Figure 5-73 Help menu.............................................................................................................................................. 5-94
Figure 5-74 About dialog........................................................................................................................................... 5-94
Figure 6-1 Login window............................................................................................................................................. 6-2
Figure 6-2 Tree – fast view tree (left) and standard view tree (right) ..................................................................... 6-3
Figure 8-1 Two associated layouts for redundant operation ..................................................................................... 8-7
Figure 8-2 Overlaying layouts ..................................................................................................................................... 8-7
Figure 8-3 Work and display area in dual mode ........................................................................................................ 8-8
Figure 8-4 Displaying windows of a couple on overlapping areas ........................................................................... 8-9

____________________________________________________________________________________
Barco – iStudio – R5976569 – user's manual – revision 09 – March-2007 13-4